Amendments for Testing and Monitoring Provisions

AGENCY:

Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).

ACTION:

Final rule: amendments.

SUMMARY:

In this rule, we, the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) are making final minor amendments to our stationary source testing and monitoring rules. These amendments include miscellaneous editorial changes and technical corrections that are needed. We are also promulgating Performance Specification 15, which contains the criteria for certifying continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) that use fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR). In addition, we are changing the outline of the test methods and CEMS performance specifications already listed in Parts 60, 61, and 63 to fit a new format recommended by the Environmental Monitoring Management Council (EMMC). The editorial changes and technical corrections update the rules and help maintain their original intent. Performance Specification 15 will provide the needed acceptance criteria for FTIR CEMS as they emerge as a new technology. We are reformatting the test methods and performance specifications to make them more uniform in content and interchangeable with other Agency methods. The amendments apply to a large number of industries that are already subject to the current provisions of Parts 60, 61, and 63. Therefore, we have not listed specific affected industries or their Standard Industrial Classification codes here.

DATES:

Effective Date. This regulation is effective October 17, 2000. The incorporation by reference of certain publications listed in the rule is approved by the Director of the Federal Register as of October 17, 2000.

ADDRESSES:

Docket. Docket No. A-97-12, contains information relevant to this rule. You can read and copy it between 8 a.m. and 5:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, (except for Federal holidays), at our Air and Radiation Docket and Information Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 401 M Street, SW., Washington, DC 20460; telephone (202) 260-7548. Go to Room M-1500, Waterside Mall (ground floor). The docket office may charge a reasonable fee for copying.

Summary of Comments and Responses Document. You may obtain the Summary of Comments and Responses Document over the Internet at http://www.epa.gov/ttn/emc;; choose the “Methods” menu, then choose the “Summary of Comments and Responses” hypertext under Category A.

FOR FURTHER INFORMATION CONTACT:

Mr. Foston Curtis, Emission Measurement Center (MD-19), Emissions, Monitoring, and Analysis Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711; telephone (919) 541-1063; facsimile number (919) 541-1039; electronic mail address “curtis.foston@epamail.epa.gov”.

SUPPLEMENTARY INFORMATION:

Outline. The information presented in this preamble is organized as follows:

I. Why were these amendments made?

II. What does the new EMMC Format for methods look like?

III. What were the significant public comments and what resulting changes were made since proposal?

A. Updates to the ASTM Methods

B. Performance requirements for continuous instrumental methods of Part 60—Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20

C. Method 18 (Part 60)

D. Method 25 (Part 60)

E. Performance Specification 15 (Part 60)

IV. What revisions were made that were not in the proposed rule?

V. What are the administrative requirements for this rule?

A. Docket

B. Office of Management and Budget Review

C. Regulatory Flexibility Act Compliance

D. Paperwork Reduction Act

E. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act

F. E.O. 13132—Federalism

G. E.O. 13084—Consultation and Coordination with Indian Tribal Governments

H. Executive Order 13084—Protection of Children from Environmental Health Risks and Safety Risks

I. Submission to Congress and the General Accounting Office

J. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act

K. Plain Language in Government Writing

I. Why Were These Amendments Made?

We have compiled miscellaneous errors and editions that are needed for the test methods, performance specifications, and associated regulations in 40 CFR Parts 60, 61, and 63. The corrections and revisions consist primarily of typographical errors, technical errors in equations and diagrams, and narrative that is no longer applicable or is obsolete. Some of the revisions were brought to our attention by the public. The major changes to the rule proposed on August 27, 1997 that resulted from public comments are discussed in Section III. Please note that, although numerous technical corrections were made to Parts 60, 61, and 63 rules, none affected a compliance standard or reporting or recordkeeping requirement. Revisions were only made to sections that pertain to source testing or monitoring of emissions and operations.

II. What Does the New EMMC Format for Methods Look Like?

The new EMMC format we have adopted for analytical methods was developed by consensus and will help integrate make consistent the test methods written by different EPA programs. The test methods and performance specifications being restructured in the new format are shown in Table 1.

The methods and specifications listed in Table 1 were restructured in the format shown in Table 2. Only in a few instances were there deviations from this recommended format.

III. What Were the Significant Public Comments and What Resulting Changes Were Made Since Proposal?

We asked that public comments on the August 27, 1997 proposal (62 FR 45369) be submitted by October 27, 1997. On November 18, 1997, we reopened (62 FR 61483) the comment period to allow additional time for review and comment. We received comments from facility owners and operators, trade associations, State and Local air pollution control agencies, environmental consultants, and private citizens. Their comments were considered in developing this final action. A detailed discussion of all comments are contained in the Summary of Comments and Responses Document (see ADDRESSES section of this preamble). The major public comments and the Agency's responses are summarized below.

A. Update to ASTM Methods

Several commenters supported our updating the references to ASTM Standards to include the dates of the most recent versions. However, some were concerned that updated standards not supplant the versions previously allowed and those promulgated with the original regulation. The ASTM recommended we follow the tradition of other governmental agencies and list only the latest version of each standard. This would present the latest, most improved standard. They felt that previously approved versions would still be acceptable for future use, and this could be noted in the preamble to the final rule.

On January 14, 1998, we published a supplementary Federal Register notice to solicit public comments on this idea. We received three comment letters. All commenters objected to the idea of listing only the latest version of the ASTM standard. The commenters noted problems that would be encountered with State Implementation Plans (SIP) wherein only the specific ASTM standards listed in the subparts would be allowed. They feared that listing only the latest version of the standard would change the current allowance to use earlier versions. This could potentially change the intent of the original emission standard. Most commenters didn't think a preamble explanation was sufficient assurance for continued allowance of earlier versions since preambles are not published in the Code of Federal Regulations. There were additional concerns for laboratories using currently acceptable versions who would need to upgrade their practice to reflect the latest version of a standard. The commenters were not amenable to only listing the latest standard unless language were added to the General Provisions of each part stating that previously allowed versions of the standards were still allowed at the discretion of the source. We feel the commenters have valid concerns and have decided to continue the convention of listing all acceptable versions of the ASTM standards including the new updates. The intent of this action is to allow any of the yearly-designated versions of a specific standard to be used in the applications where cited.

B. Performance Requirements for Continuous Instrumental Methods of Part 60—Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20

Several commenters thought the preamble language for this proposal gave inadequate notice of the changes being made. Commenters stated that, in the proposal, we did not provide an adequate basis and purpose statement and misled the readers into thinking that the proposal contained no substantive changes to these test methods. Based on the number of substantive changes in this proposal, and in light of the Section 307(d) requirements, the commenters felt that we must address these issues in a new proposal before the revisions can go final with the rest of the package. We agree with the commenters that the preamble to the proposed rule may not have given adequate public notice for some of the revisions. The revisions to the continuous instrumental methods (Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20) may be considered substantive, but were not enumerated in the preamble nor was a supporting rationale given. Therefore, the revisions to Methods 3A, 6C, 7E, 10, and 20 will be reproposed as a separate rule. The comments already received on the proposal of these methods will be held for consideration with any future comments that result from the reproposal.

C. Method 18 (Part 60, Appendix A)

One commenter thought Method 18 was difficult to follow. The commenter suggested that, to simplify organization of the method, we should divide the method into five categories. Each title would begin with “Measurement of Gaseous Organic Compounds by Gas Chromatography” but have the following subtitles:

18A—Evacuated container sampling procedure.

18B—Bag sampling procedure.

18C—Direct interface procedure.

18D—Dilution interface procedure.

18E—Adsorption tube sampling procedure.

Another commenter suggested dividing the method into two different methods, one for the direct extractive technique, and the other for sample collection into bags, flasks, or adsorbents.

The method is currently divided according to the various sampling procedures; for example, Section 8.2.2 is the Direct Interface Sampling and Analysis Procedures, Section 8.2.3 is Dilution Interface Sampling and Analysis Procedures, and so on. We do not believe that multiple sampling procedures warrant dividing Method 18 into separate methods. We feel a single method allowing different procedures offers the source greater flexibility than citing specific procedures for particular situations. One commenter noted that the proposed method requires triplicate injections for analysis of the calibration standards used for preparing the pre-test calibration curve, triplicate injections of the test samples, and triplicate injections for construction of the post-test calibration curve. The commenter questioned the additional accuracy expected for the extra hours spent in sample analysis and calibration while in the field conducting a source test compared to the current method which requires two consecutive analyses for pre- and post-test calibration and sample analyses meeting the same criteria for acceptance. We are increasing the calibration requirement to triple injections to tighten the method's quality assurance procedures. Triplicate calibration injections is the normal procedure prevalent in the analytical community, as well as in other Agency methodologies. It is difficult to establish precision and accuracy with duplicate injections. However, triplicate injections provide a reasonable measure of analytical precision without being overly burdensome. We do not feel the increase in time and costs associated with the third injection will significantly affect a typical test, considering the added benefits to data quality that are gained.

Several commenters asked us to revise and clarify various aspects of Section 10. We have made these modifications to address their concerns.

Regarding Section 13.1, one commenter noted that Method 18 is not a method in the general sense, but is more of a guideline on how to develop and document a test method. The commenter therefore felt that any prospective method should be written up and submitted to us along with the proper documentation that includes recovery study results. We disagree with this commenter. Method 18, which has been cited and used for many years, is a specific gas chromatography method with specific sampling, analytical, and data quality requirements. The method was written to accomodate many test sites having many possible target compounds and gas matrices. The tester has been given numerous sampling, separation, and analytical system options to make the method adaptable to the needs of various compliance demonstrations.

Several commenters asked us to clarify the 5 to 10 percent relative standard deviation (RSD) requirement for calibration standards in Section 13.1.

We have added clarity to Section 13.1. The 5 to 10 percent RSD is not a precision criterion for calibration standards but a typical precision range for analyzing field samples. Five percent RSD is required for triplicate injections of calibration standards.

D. Method 25 (Part 60, Appendix A)

One commenter noted that Method 25 has limitations due to conditions that may exist in stack gas. If such conditions exist, the commenter recommends interfacing a nonmethane analyzer directly to the source or use Method 25A or 25B to measure the emissions. The commenter recommended modifying Method 25 to allow instruments that are able to determine the methane and nonmethane portions using components different from those described by Method 25 when the analyzer is directly interfaced to the source. The commenter feels that Method 25 would be more practical for determining methane/nonmethane emissions at the field site if the method could be modified to allow these other analyzers. The commenter feels that it will also be necessary that fixed performance specifications be defined in the method, such as those for Method 6C. We believe these comments address method changes that are beyond those covered in the proposal and are, therefore, beyond the scope of this action. The commenter is encouraged to pursue these method changes through other appropriate channels such as submitting a request to use them as an alternative method.

E. Performance Specification 15 (Part 60, Appendix B)

One commenter noted that the statement of applicability for the demonstration is limited to the criteria we gave. The commenter stated that, with performance based measurement systems, the focus is on data quality objectives (DQO) where the performance specifications are coupled with the DQO. We believe the purpose of reference methods and, in this case performance specifications, is to provide standard procedures for sources to follow in order to provide quality emission data. However, we do provide latitude to sources by publishing performance-based methods and PS whenever possible. This performance specification is one such procedure; as long as an FTIR sampling system meets the requirements of the performance specifications, it can be used for any regulated pollutant.

Based on public comments and upon further deliberation, we have removed the system calibration requirement from Section 10.3 of PS-15. Since both a system calibration and the calibration transfer standard measurement basically test instrument function, having both of these requirements in the performance specifications is redundant.

One commenter felt that the number of runs should be given as “guidance” rather than made a requirement. We set the requirement for nine runs (when comparing the FTIR to a reference method) and 10 runs (when comparing the FTIR to a reference monitor) because these are standard prodedures for performance specifications. We note that this performance specification also allows analyte spiking as an option; therefore, a revision on this point is not necessary.

One commenter noted that Section 11.1.1.4.3 states “if the RM is a CEM, synchronize the sampling flow rates of the RM and the FTIR CEM.” The commenter noted that instrumental analyzers are currently used for reference methods. EPA Methods 6C, 7E, 3A, and 10 measure SO₂, NO_X, O₂, CO₂, and CO on a continuous basis for a short period of time and are referred to as instrumental analyzers and not CEMs. The commenter felt the statement should read “if the reference method is an instrumental analyzer, synchronize the sampling flow rates of the RM and the FTIR.” We agree with the commenter and have made the noted change.

IV. What Revisions Were Made That Were Not in the Proposed Rule?

A revision was made to Section 6.6 of Method 21 of Part 60 to clarify the VOC monitoring instrument specifications. The requirement for the instrument to be intrinsically safe for Classes 1 and 2, Division 1 conditions has been amended to require them to be intrinsically safe for Class 1 and/or Class 2, Division 1 conditions, as appropriate. The performance test provisions of § 60.754(d) for determining control device efficiency when combusting landfill gas were amended to allow the use of Method 25 as an alternative to Methods 18 and 25C. The tester has the option of using either Method 18, 25, or 25C in this case. These amendments were not published in the proposed rule.

V. Administrative Requirements

A. Docket

B. Office of Management and Budget Review

Under Executive Order 12866 (58 FR 51735 October 4, 1993), we must determine whether the regulatory action is “significant” and therefore subject to Office of Management and Budget (OMB) review and the requirements of this Executive Order. The Order defines “significant regulatory action” as one that is likely to result in a rule that may: (1) Have an annual effect on the economy of $100 million or more or adversely affect in a material way the economy, a sector of the economy, productivity, competition, jobs, the environment, public health or safety, or State, Local, or Tribal governments or communities; (2) Create a serious inconsistency or otherwise interfere with an action taken or planned by another agency; (3) Materially alter the budgetary impact of entitlements, grants, user fees, or loan programs, or the rights and obligations of recipients thereof; or (4) Raise novel legal or policy issues arising out of legal mandates, the President's priorities, or the principles set forth in the Executive Order.

We have determined that this rule is not a “significant regulatory action” under the terms of Executive Order 12866 and is therefore not subject to OMB review. We have determined that this regulation would result in none of the economic effects set forth in Section 1 of the Order because it does not impose emission measurement requirements beyond those specified in the current regulations, nor does it change any emission standard.

C. Regulatory Flexibility Act Compliance

We have determined that it is not necessary to prepare a regulatory flexibility analysis in connection with this final rule. We have also determined that this rule will not have a significant economic impact on a substantial number of small businesses. This rulemaking does not impose emission measurement requirements beyond those specified in the current regulations, nor does it change any emission standard.

D. Paperwork Reduction Act

This rule does not impose or change any information collection requirements. The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980, 44 U.S.C. 3501, et seq., is not required.

E. Unfunded Mandates Reform Act

Title II of the unfunded Mandates Reform Act of 1995 (UMRA), Pub. L. 104-4, establishes requirements for Federal agencies to assess the effects of their regulatory action on State, local, and tribal governments and the private sector. Under section 202 of the UMRA, we generally must prepare a written statement, including a cost-benefit analysis, for proposed and final rules with “Federal mandates” that may result in expenditures by State, local, and tribal governments, in the aggregate, or by the private sector, of $100 million or more in any one year. Before promulgating an EPA rule for which a written statement is needed, Section 205 of the UMRA generally requires us to identify and consider a reasonable number of regulatory alternatives and adopt the least costly, most cost-effective or least burdensome alternative that achieves the objectives of the rule. The provisions of Section 205 do not apply when they are inconsistent with applicable law. Moreover, Section 205 allows EPA to adopt an alternative other than the least costly, most cost-effective or least burdensome alternative if the Administrator publishes with the final rule an explanation why that alternative was not adopted. Before we establish any regulatory requirement that may significantly or uniquely affect small governments, including tribal governments, we must develop a small government agency plan as required under Section 203 of the UMRA. The plan must provide for notifying potentially affected small governments, enabling officials of affected small governments to have meaningful and timely input in the development of our regulatory proposals with significant Federal intergovernmental mandates, and informing, educating, and advising small governments on compliance with the regulatory requirements.

Today's rule contains no Federal mandates (under the regulatory provisions of Title II of the UMRA) for State, local, or tribal governments or the private sector. We have determined that today's rule does not include a Federal mandate because it imposes no enforceable duty on any State, local, and tribal governments, or the private sector. Today's rule simply makes corrections and minor revisions to current testing requirements and promulgates a monitoring specification that can be used to support future monitoring rules. For the same reason we have also determined that this rule contains no regulatory requirements that might significantly or uniquely affect small governments.

F. Executive Order 13132 (Federalism)

Executive Order 13132, entitled “Federalism” (64 FR 43255, August 10, 1999), requires EPA to develop an accountable process to ensure “meaningful and timely input by State and local officials in the development of regulatory policies that have federalism implications.” “Policies that have federalism implications” is defined in the Executive Order to include regulations that have “substantial direct effects on the States, on the relationship between the national government and the States, or on the distribution of power and responsibilities among the various levels of government.” Under Executive Order 13132, EPA may not issue a regulation that has federalism implications, that imposes substantial direct compliance costs, and that is not required by statute, unless the Federal government provides the funds necessary to pay the direct compliance costs incurred by State and local governments, or EPA consults with State and local officials early in the process of developing the proposed regulation. EPA also may not issue a regulation that has federalism implications and that preempts State law unless the Agency consults with State and local officials early in the process of developing the proposed regulation.

If EPA complies by consulting, Executive Order 13132 requires EPA to provide to the Office of Management and Budget (OMB), in a separately identified section of the preamble to the rule, a federalism summary impact statement (FSIS). The FSIS must include a description of the extent of EPA's prior consultation with State and local officials, a summary of the nature of their concerns and the agency's position supporting the need to issue the regulation, and a statement of the extent to which the concerns of State and local officials have been met. Also, when EPA transmits a draft final rule with federalism implications to OMB for review pursuant to Executive Order 12866, EPA must include a certification from the agency's Federalism Official stating that EPA has met the requirements of Executive Order 13132 in a meaningful and timely manner.

This final rule will not have substantial direct effects on the States, on the relationship between the national government and the States, or on the distribution of power and responsibilities among the various levels of government, as specified in Executive Order 13132. This final rule simply makes corrections and minor revisions to current testing requirements and promulgates a monitoring specification that can be used to support future monitoring rules. Thus, the requirements of section 6 of the Executive Order do not apply to this rule.

G. Executive Order 13084: Consultation and Coordination With Indian Tribal Governments

Under Executive Order 13084, we may not issue a regulation that is not required by statute, that significantly or uniquely affects the communities of Indian tribal governments, and that imposes substantial direct compliance costs on those communities, unless the Federal government provides the funds necessary to pay the direct compliance costs incurred by the tribal governments, or we consult with those governments. If we comply by consulting, Executive Order 13094 requires us to provide to the Office of Management and Budget, in a separately identified section of the preamble to the rule, a description of the extent of our prior consultation with representatives of affected tribal governments, a summary of the nature of their concerns, and a statement supporting the need to issue the regulation. In addition, Executive Order 13084 requires us to develop an effective process permitting elected and other representatives of Indian tribal governments “to provide meaningful and timely input in the development of regulatory policies on matters that significantly or uniquely affect their communities.” Today's rule does not significantly or uniquely affect the communities of Indian tribal governments. This rule only amends regulatory requirements that are already in effect and adds no additional requirements. Accordingly, the requirements of Section 3(b) of Executive Order 13084 do not apply to this rule.

H. Executive Order 13045: Protection of Children From Environmental Health Risks and Safety Risks

Executive Order 13045: “Protection of Children from Environmental Health Risks and Safety Risks” (62 FR 19885, April 23, 1997) applies to any rule that: (1) Is determined to be “economically significant” as defined under E.O. 12866, and (2) concerns an environmental health or safety risk that we have reason to believe may have a disproportionate effect on children. If the regulatory action meets both criteria, we must evaluate the environmental health or safety effects of the planned rule on children, and explain why the planned regulation is preferable to other potentially effective and reasonably feasible alternatives we considered.

We interpret E.O. 13045 as applying only to those regulatory actions that are based on health or safety risks, such that the analysis required under section 5-501 of the Order has the potential to influence the regulation. This rule is not subject to E.O. 13045 because it does not establish an environmental standard intended to mitigate health or safety risks.

I. Submission to Congress and the General Accounting Office

The Congressional Review Act, 5 U.S.C. 801, et seq., as added by the Small Business Regulatory Enforcement Fairness Act of 1996, generally provides that before a rule may take effect, the agency promulgating the rule must submit a rule report, which includes a copy of the rule, to each House of the Congress and to the Comptroller General of the United States. We will submit a report containing this rule and other required information to the U.S. Senate, the U.S. House of Representatives, and the Comptroller General of the United States before it is published in the Federal Register. This action is not a “major rule” as defined by 5 U.S.C. 804(2). This rule will be effective October 17, 2000.

J. National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act

Section 12(d) of the National Technology Transfer and Advancement Act of 1995 (NTTAA), P.L. 104-113 (15 U.S.C. 272), directs us to use voluntary consensus standards (VCSs) in our regulatory activities unless to do so would be inconsistent with applicable law or otherwise impractical. Voluntary consensus standards are technical standards (e.g., materials specifications, test methods, sampling procedures, business practices, etc.) that are developed or adopted by VCS bodies. The NTTAA requires us to provide Congress, through OMB, explanations when we decide not to use available and applicable VCSs.

This rulemaking involves technical standards. Specifically, this rule makes technical corrections to portions of the subparts in Parts 60, 61, and 63 pertaining to source testing or monitoring of emissions and operations. The rule does not, however, change the nature of any of the technical standards currently in use. Moreover, many of the technical standards currently in use are VCSs developed by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). In fact, we have taken the opportunity presented by this rulemaking to update the references to the ASTM standards to include the dates of the most recent versions of these standards (see Section III.A. of the preamble for a full discussion). A complete list of the ASTM standards updated by this rule can be found in Part 60.17. Thus, today's action is consistent with our obligation to use VCSs in our regulatory activities whenever practicable.

Finally, we are promulgating PS-15, which identifies certification criteria for continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) using fourier transform infrared spectroscopy (FTIR). PS-15 is a performance specification that is being issued as an example procedure for use by industry and regulatory agencies as appropriate. While there are no underlying national EPA standards that will require the use of this procedure at this time, we conducted a search for VCS FTIR performance specifications and found none. We plan to periodically conduct rulemaking to make minor updates to test methods and performance specifications. In these rulemakings, we will review updates to VCS incorporated by reference and consider VCSs that may be used in lieu of EPA reference methods. We plan to provide the opportunity for public comment during these update rulemakings in part to allow VCS organizations to suggest where VCSs may be available for our use.

K. Plain Language in Government Writing

This rule is not written in the plain language format. In most cases, the rule corrects errors and makes updates to small portions of existing regulations that are not in plain language. The new plain language format was not used to keep the language of the amended sections consistent with that of the unamended rules. Also, the test methods were reformatted and proposed before the plain language provisions were mandated. Due to their volume, the time and costs associated with the magnitude of effort required to rewrite the final methods in plain language is prohibitive. However, this preamble is written in plain language, and we believe the amendments and reformatted test methods have been written clearly.

List of Subjects

40 CFR Part 60

• Environmental protection
• Administrative practice and procedure
• Air pollution control
• Continuous emission monitors
• Incorporation by reference

40 CFR Part 61

• Environmental protection
• Air pollution control
• Incorporation by reference

40 CFR Part 63

• Environmental protection
• Administrative practice and procedure
• Air pollution control
• Hazardous substances
• Intergovernmental relations
• Incorporation by reference
• Reporting and recordkeeping requirements

For the reasons stated in the preamble, The Environmental Protection Agency amends title 40, chapter I of the Code of Federal Regulations as follows:

PART 60—STANDARDS OF PERFORMANCE FOR NEW STATIONARY SOURCES

1. The authority citation for part 60 continues to read as follows:

Authority: 42 U.S.C. 7401, 7411, 7413, 7414, 7416, 7601, and 7602.

2. Amend § 60.11 by:

a. In paragraphs (b) and (e)(1), by revising the words “Reference Method 9” to read “Method 9” wherever they occur;

b. In paragraph (e)(5), revise the words “to determine opacity compliance” in the last sentence to read “to determine compliance with the opacity standard.”

3. Amend § 60.13 by:

a. Revising the last two sentences in paragraph (d)(1), revising paragraph (g), and revising the first sentence in paragraph (j)(2).

b. Revising the words “ng/J of pollutant” to read “ng of pollutant per J of heat input” in the sixth sentence of paragraph (h).

c. Revising the words “with the effluent gases” to read “in the effluent gases” in paragraph (i)(1).

d. Revising the words “effluent from two or more affected facilities are released” to read “effluent from two or more affected facilities is released” in paragraph (i)(9).

e. Revising the words “relative accuracy test” to read “relative accuracy (RA) test” in the paragraph (j) introductory text.

f. Revising the words “relative accuracy” to read “RA” in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2).

g. Revising the section references “section 7” and “section 10” to read “Section 8.4” and “Section 16.0,” respectively, in paragraphs (j)(1) and (2).

The revisions read as follows:

4. In § 60.14, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words “utilization of emission factors demonstrate” to read “utilization of emission factors demonstrates.”

5. Amend § 60.17 by:

a. Revising paragraphs (a), (i), and (j).

b. In paragraph (b)(1), revise the words “§§ 60.204(d)(2), 60.214(d)(2), 60.224(d)(2), 60.234(d)(2)” to read “§§ 60.204(b)(3), 60.214(b)(3), 60.224(b)(3), 60.234(b)(3).”

c. In paragraph (d), by revising the words “IBR approved January 27, 1983 for § 60.285(d)(4)” to read “IBR approved January 27, 1983 for § 60.285(d)(3).”

The revisions read as follows:

6. Amend § 60.18 as follows:

a. In paragraph (f)(1), the first sentence is amended by revising “Reference Method 22” to read “Method 22 of Appendix A to this part.”

b. In paragraph (f)(3), the definition of “C _i” is amended by revising “ASTM D1946-77” to read “ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).”

c. In paragraph (f)(3), the definition of “H _i” is amended by revising “ASTM D2382-76” to read “ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or D4809-95.”

7. In § 60.41, paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words “the American Society and Testing and Materials, Designation D388-77” to read “ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.”

8. In § 60.42, paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2), are amended by removing the symbol “%” wherever it appears, and adding “percent” in its place.

9. Amend § 60.45 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(2) by removing the words “under paragraph (d) of this section.”

b. In paragraphs (f)(4)(i), (f)(4)(ii), and (f)(4)(vi) by revising the words “ASTM D388-77” to read “ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.”

c. In paragraph (f)(5)(i) by revising the words “ASTM method D1137-53, (75), D1945-64(76), or D1946-77” to read “ASTM D1137-53 or 75, D1945-64, 76, 91, or 96 or D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).”

d. In paragraph (f)(5)(i) by revising the words “ASTM method D3178-74 or D3176” to read “ASTM D3178-73 (Reapproved 1979), 89, or D3176-74 or 89.”

e. In paragraph (f)(5)(ii) by revising the words “ASTM D1826-77” to read “ASTM D1826-77 or 94.”

f. In paragraph (f)(5)(ii) by revising the words “ASTM D2015-77” to read “ASTM D2015-77 (Reapproved 1978), 96, or D5865-98.”

10. Amend § 60.46 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(2)(i), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “in the sampling train may be set to provide a gas temperature no greater than” to read “in the sampling train shall be set to provide an average gas temperature of.”

b. In paragraph (b)(2)(ii), the third sentence is amended by revising the words “the arithmetic mean of all the individual O ₂ sample concentrations at each traverse point” to read “the arithmetic mean of the sample O₂ concentrations at all traverse points.”

c. Paragraph (c)(2) is amended by revising the words “D2015-77” to read “D2015-77 (Reapproved 1978), 96, or D5865-98”.

d. Paragraph (c)(2) is further amended by revising the words “D240-76” to read “D240-76 or 92.”

e. In paragraph (c)(2) is further amended by revising the words “D1826-77” to read “D1826-77 or 94.”

11. Amend § 60.41a as follows:

a. In the definitions for “subbituminous coal” and “lignite,” by revising “D388-77” to read “D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.”

b. In paragraph (a)(2) of the definition of “potential combustion concentration” by revising “75 ng/J” to read “73 ng/J.”

12. In § 60.43a, paragraph (d)(2), revising the words “resource recovery facility” to read “resource recovery unit.”

13. Amend § 60.47a as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(3) by removing the words “(appendix A).”

b. In the first sentence of paragraph (g) by revising the words “lbs/million Btu” to read “lb/million Btu.”

c. In the second sentence of paragraph (h)(3) by revising the words “309 minutes in each hour” to read “30 minutes in each hour.”

d. In paragraph (i)(1) by revising the words “6, 7, and 3B, as applicable, shall be used to determine O ₂, SO₂, and NO_X concentrations” to read “3B, 6, and 7 shall be used to determine O₂, SO₂, and NO_X concentrations, respectively.”

14. Amend § 60.48a as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(2)(ii), in the fourth sentence by revising the words “the arithmetic mean of all the individual O ₂ concentrations at each traverse point.” to read “the arithmetic mean of the sample O₂ concentrations at all traverse points.”

b. In paragraph (c)(3), in the first sentence by adding a closing parenthesis after the abbreviation “(%R _g” so that it now reads “(%R_g)”.

c. In paragraph (f), in the first and second sentences by removing the words “(appendix A).”

15. § 60.40b is amended by adding paragraph (j) as follows:

16. Amend § 60.41b as follows:

a. In the definition for “coal” by revising “ASTM D388-77” to read “ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.”

b. In the definition for “distillate oil” by revising “ASTM D396-78” to read “ASTM D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.”

c. In the definition for “lignite” by revising “ASTM D388-77” to read “ASTM D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.”

d. In the definition for “natural gas” by revising “ASTM D1835-82” to read “ASTM D1835-82, 86, 87, 91, or 97.”

17. In § 60.42b, paragraph (d), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “facilities under this paragraph” to read “facilities under paragraphs (d)(1), (2), or (3).”

18. In § 60.43b, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the words “22 ng/J (0.05 lb/million Btu)” to read “22 ng/J (0.051 lb/million Btu).”

19. Amend § 60.46b as follows:

a. In paragraph (d)(4) by revising the words “160 °C (320 °F)” to read “160±14 °C (320±25 °F).”

b. In paragraph (d)(6)(iii) by removing the words “(appendix A).”

20. Amend § 60.41c as follows:

a. In the definition for “natural gas” by revising “D1835-86” to read “D1835-86, 87, 91, or 97.”

b. In the definitions for “distillate oil” and “residual oil” by revising “D396-78” to read “D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.”

21. Amend § 60.42c as follows:

a. In paragraph (a), in the first sentence by revising the words “the owner the operator” to read “the owner or operator.”

b. In paragraph (c), in the second sentence by revising the words “facilities under this paragraph” to read “facilities under paragraphs (c)(1), (2), (3), or (4).”

22. In § 60.43c, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the words “22 ng/J (0.05 lb/million Btu)” to read “22 ng/J (0.051 lb/million Btu).”

23. In § 60.44c, paragraph (i), the third sentence is amended by revising the words “24-hour averaged” to read “24-hour average.”

24. Amend § 60.45c as follows:

a. Redesignate paragraphs (a)(5) through (a)(7) as paragraphs (a)(6) through (a)(8), respectively.

b. Revise paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) and add paragraph (a)(5).

The redesignation, revisions and addition read as follows:

25. In § 60.46c, paragraphs (b) and (d) are amended by revising the abbreviation “CEM” to read “CEMS” wherever it appears.

26. In § 60.47c, paragraphs (a) and (b) are amended by revising the abbreviation “CEMS” to read “COMS” wherever it appears.

27. In § 60.48c, paragraph (b) is amended by replacing the abbreviation “CEMS” with the words “CEMS and/or COMS.”

28. In § 60.52, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “the performance test required to be conducted by § 60.8 is completed” to read “the initial performance test is completed or required to be completed under § 60.8 of this part, whichever date comes first.”

29. Amend § 60.54 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “The emission rate (c ₁₂)” to read “The concentration (c₁₂).”

b. In paragraph (b)(3)(i), in the third sentence by revising the words “the arithmetic mean of all the individual CO ₂ sample concentrations at each traverse point” to read “the arithmetic mean of the sample CO₂ concentrations at all traverse points.”

30. Section 60.51a is amended by adding a new difinition in alphabetical order to read as follows:

31. Amend § 60.58a as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(3), in the first sentence by revising the words “particulate matter emission standard” to read “particulate matter emission limit.”

b. In paragraph (b)(3), in the third sentence by revising the words “a gas temperature no greater than” to read “a gas temperature of.”

c. In paragraph (b)(8) by revising the words “operate a CEMS for measuring opacity” to read “operate a continuous opacity monitoring system (COMS).”

d. In paragraph (e)(10) by revising the word “Section” to read “section.”

e. In paragraph (e)(14) by revising the words “outlet to” to read “outlet of.”

f. In paragraph (f)(2) by revising the words “Method 26” to read “Method 26 or 26A.”

32-36. Amend § 60.58b as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “(or carbon dioxide)” to read “(or 20 percent carbon dioxide)” each place it appears.

b. In paragraph (f)(1), in the second sentence by removing the words “for Method 26.”

c. In paragraph (f)(2) by removing the words “Method 26.”

37. Amend § 60.56c as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(4), in the first and second sentences by revising the words “Method 3 or 3A” to read “Method 3, 3A, or 3B.”

b. In paragraph (b)(10), in the first sentence by revising the words “Method 26” to read “Method 26 or 26A.”

38. Amend § 60.64(b)(1) as follows:

a. In the definition of the term “c _s”, “(g/dscf)” is revised to read “(gr/dscf).”

b. In the definition of the term “K”, “(453.6 g/lb)” is revised to read “(7000 gr/lb).”

39. Amend § 60.84 as follows:

a. In paragraph (d), in the third sentence by revising the words “monitoring of” to read “monitoring systems for measuring.”

b. In paragraph (d), in the fourth sentence by revising the words “this SO ₂” to read “the SO₂.”

41. In § 60.104, paragraph (b)(2) is amended by revising the words “9.8 kg/1,000 kg” to read “9.8 kg/Mg (20 lb/ton).”

42. Amend § 60.105 by:

a. In paragraphs (a)(3)(iii) and (a)(5)(ii), the words “Methods 6 and 3” in the second sentence are revised to read “Methods 6 or 6C and 3 or 3A.”

b. In paragraph (a)(4)(iii), the words “Method 11 shall be used for conducting the relative accuracy evaluations” are revised to read “Method 11, 15, 15A, or 16 shall be used for conducting the relative accuracy evaluations.”

c. In paragraphs (a)(3)(i), (a)(5)(i), (a)(6)(i), and (a)(7)(i), “10” is revised to read “25.”

d. In paragraph (a)(6)(ii), the first sentence and paragraphs (a)(8), (a)(9), and (a)(12) are revised.

e. In paragraph (a)(10), the abbreviation “vppm” is revised to read “ppmv”.

f. In paragraph (c), “(thousands of kilograms per hour)” is revised to read “(Mg (tons) per hour).”

g. In paragraph (d), the words “(liters/hr or kg/hr)” are removed.

The revisions read as follows:

a. In paragraphs (b)(1), (b)(3), (c)(1), (i)(9) by revising the equations and definitions.

b. In paragraph (b)(3)(ii) by revising the words “Method 3” to read “Method 3B.”

c. Revising paragraph (e).

d. Revising paragraph (f)(1).

e. In paragraph (f)(3) by revising the words “Method 3” to read “Method 3 or 3A” and by revising “(h)(3)” to read “(h)(6).”

d. In paragraph (g), in the first sentence by revising the words “the applicable test methods and procedures specified in this section” to read “Method 6 or 6C and Method 3 or 3A.”

e. In paragraphs (h)(1), (h)(3), and (h)(4) by revising the abbreviation “vppm” to read “ppmv” wherever it occurs.

f. In paragraph (i)(2)(i) by revising the words “for the concentration of sulfur oxides calculated as sulfur dioxide and moisture content” to read “for moisture content and for the concentration of sulfur oxides calculated as sulfur dioxide.”

g. Revising paragraph (i)(9) following the introductory text and paragraph (i)(10).

h. In paragraph (i)(11) by revising the words “per 1,000 kg of coke burn-off” to read “per Mg (ton) of coke burn-off.”

i. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words “ASTM D129-64 (Reapproved 1978)” to read “ASTM D129-64, 78, or 95.”

j. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words “ASTM D1552-83” to read “ASTM D1552-83 or 95.”

k. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words “ASTM D2622-87” to read “ASTM D2622-87, 94, or 98.”

l. In paragraph (j)(2) by revising the words “ASTM D1266-87” to read “ASTM D1266-87, 91, or 98.”

The revisions read as follows:

        R_c=K₁ Q_r (%CO₂+%CO)-(K₂ Q_a−K₃ Q_r)((%CO/2)+(%CO₂+%O₂))

Where:

R_c = Coke burn-off rate, Mg/hr (ton/hr).

Q_r = Volumetric flow rate of exhaust gas from catalyst regenerator before entering the emission control system, dscm/min (dscf/min).

Q_a = Volumetric flow rate of air to FCCU regenerator, as determined from the fluid catalytic cracking unit control room instrumentation, dscm/min (dscf/min).

%CO₂ = Carbon dioxide concentration, percent by volume (dry basis).

%CO = Carbon monoxide concentration, percent by volume (dry basis).

%O₂ = Oxygen concentration, percent by volume (dry basis).

K₁ = Material balance and conversion factor, 2.982 × 10⁻⁴ (Mg-min)/(hr-dscm-%) [9.31 × 10⁻⁶ (ton-min)/(hr-dscf-%)].

K₂ = Material balance and conversion factor, 2.088 × 10⁻³ (Mg-min)/(hr-dscm-%) [6.52 × 10⁻⁵ (ton-min)/(hr-dscf-%)].

K₃ = Material balance and conversion factor, 9.94 × 10⁻⁵ (Mg-min)/(hr-dscm-%) [3.1 × 10⁻⁶ (ton-min)/(hr-dscf-%)].

(c) * * *

(1) * * *

Image Not Available

Where:

E_s = Emission rate of PM allowed, kg/Mg (lb/ton) of coke burn-off in catalyst regenerator.

F=Emission standard, 1.0 kg/Mg (2.0 lb/ton) of coke burn-off in catalyst regenerator.

A = Allowable incremental rate of PM emissions, 7.5 × 10⁻⁴ kg/million J (0.10 lb/million Btu).

H = Heat input rate from solid or liquid fossil fuel, million J/hr (million Btu/hr).

R_c = Coke burn-off rate, Mg coke/hr (ton coke/hr).

(e)(1) The owner or operator shall determine compliance with the H₂ S standard in § 60.104(a)(1) as follows: Method 11, 15, 15A, or 16 shall be used to determine the H₂ S concentration. The gases entering the sampling train should be at about atmospheric pressure. If the pressure in the refinery fuel gas lines is relatively high, a flow control valve may be used to reduce the pressure. If the line pressure is high enough to operate the sampling train without a vacuum pump, the pump may be eliminated from the sampling train. The sample shall be drawn from a point near the centroid of the fuel gas line.

(i) For Method 11, the sampling time and sample volume shall be at least 10 minutes and 0.010 dscm (0.35 dscf). Two samples of equal sampling times shall be taken at about 1-hour intervals. The arithmetic average of these two samples shall constitute a run. For most fuel gases, sampling times exceeding 20 minutes may result in depletion of the collection solution, although fuel gases containing low concentrations of H₂ S may necessitate sampling for longer periods of time.

(ii) For Method 15 or 16, at least three injects over a 1-hour period shall constitute a run.

(iii) For Method 15A, a 1-hour sample shall constitute a run.

(2) Where emissions are monitored by § 60.105(a)(3), compliance with § 60.105(a)(1) shall be determined using Method 6 or 6C and Method 3 or 3A. A 1-hour sample shall constitute a run. Method 6 samples shall be taken at a rate of approximately 2 liters/min. The ppm correction factor (Method 6) and the sampling location in paragraph (f)(1) of this section apply. Method 4 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the gases. The sampling point for Method 4 shall be adjacent to the sampling point for Method 6 or 6C.

(f) * * *

(1) Method 6 shall be used to determine the SO₂ concentration. The concentration in mg/dscm obtained by Method 6 or 6C is multiplied by 0.3754 to obtain the concentration in ppm. The sampling point in the duct shall be the centroid of the cross section if the cross-sectional area is less than 5.00 m² (53.8 ft²) or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.00 m (39.4 in.) if the cross-sectional area is 5.00 m² or more and the centroid is more than 1 m from the wall. The sampling time and sample volume shall be at least 10 minutes and 0.010 dscm (0.35 dscf) for each sample. Eight samples of equal sampling times shall be taken at about 30-minute intervals. The arithmetic average of these eight samples shall constitute a run. For Method 6C, a run shall consist of the arithmetic average of four 1-hour samples. Method 4 shall be used to determine the moisture content of the gases. The sampling point for Method 4 shall be adjacent to the sampling point for Method 6 or 6C. The sampling time for each sample shall be equal to the time it takes for two Method 6 samples. The moisture content from this sample shall be used to correct the corresponding Method 6 samples for moisture. For documenting the oxidation efficiency of the control device for reduced sulfur compounds, Method 15 shall be used following the procedures of paragraph (f)(2) of this section.

(i) * * *

(9) * * *

Where:

E_SOx = sulfur oxides emission rate calculated as sulfur dioxide, kg/hr (lb/hr)

C_SOx = sulfur oxides emission concentration calculated as sulfur dioxide, g/dscm (gr/dscf)

Q_sd = dry volumetric stack gas flow rate corrected to standard conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr)

K=1,000 g/kg (7,000 gr/lb)

(10) Sulfur oxides emissions calculated as sulfur dioxide shall be determined for each test run by the following equation:

Where:

R_SOx = Sulfur oxides emissions calculated as kg sulfur dioxide per Mg (lb/ton) coke burn-off.

E_SOx = Sulfur oxides emission rate calculated as sulfur dioxide, kg/hr (lb/hr).

R_c = Coke burn-off rate, Mg/hr (ton/hr).

a. In paragraph (b) by revising “ASTM D396-78” to read “ASTM D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.”

b. In paragraph (b) by revising “ASTM D2880-78” to read “ASTM D2880-78 or 96.”

c. In paragraph (b) by revising “ASTM D975-78” to read “ASTM D975-78, 96, or 98a.”

d. In paragraph (l) by revising “ASTM D323-82” to read “ASTM D323-82 or 94.”

46. Section 60.111a is amended as follows:

a. In paragraph (b) by revising “ASTM D396-78” to read “D396-78, 89, 90, 92, 96, or 98.”

b. In paragraph (b) by revising “ASTM D2880-78” to read “ASTM D2880-78 or 96”; and by revising “ASTM D975-78” to read “ASTM D975-78, 96, or 98a.”

c. In paragraph (g) by revising “ASTM D323-82” to read “ASTM D323-82 or 94.”

47. Section 60.111b is amended as follows:

a. In paragraph (f)(3) by revising “ASTM Method D2879-83” to read “ASTM D2879-83, 96, or 97.”

b. In paragraph (g) by revising “ASTM D323-82” to read “ASTM D323-82 or 94.”

48. Section 60.116b is amended as follows:

a. In paragraph (e)(3)(ii) by revising “ASTM Method D2879-83” to read “ASTM D2879-83, 96, or 97.”

b. In paragraph (f)(2)(i) by revising “ASTM Method D2879-83” to read “ASTM D2879-83, 96, or 97.”

c. In paragraph (f)(2)(ii) by revising “ASTM Method D323-82” to read “ASTM D323-82 or 94.”

49. In § 60.121, paragraph (d) is added as follows:

50. In § 60.133, paragraph (b)(1), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “pouring of the heat” to read “pouring of part of the production cycle.”

51. In § 60.144, paragraph (c) is revised to read as follows:

52. Amend § 60.143a, paragraph (c) as follows:

a. The words “All monitoring devices” in the first sentence are revised to read “All monitoring devices required by paragraph (a) of this section.”

b. The words “EPA Reference Method 2” in the first sentence are revised to read “Method 2 of Appendix A of this part.”

c. The words “EPA Reference Method 2” in the second sentence are revised to read “Method 2.”

53. In § 60.144a, paragraph (d) is amended by revising it to read as follows:

54. In § 60.145a, paragraph (f), in the first sentence by revising the words “Reference Method 5” to read “Method 5.”

55. Amend § 60.153 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the word “thermocouple” or “thermocouples” to read “temperature measuring device” or “temperature measuring devices” wherever it occurs.

b. In paragraph (b)(5), in the second sentence by revising the words “with the method specified under § 60.154(c)(2)” to read “with the method specified under § 60.154(b)(5).”

56. In § 60.154, paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(3) are revised, and in paragraph (b)(4), the equations and definitions are revised as follows:

Where:

E = Emission rate of particulate matter, g/kg (lb/ton) of dry sludge input.

c_s = Concentration of particulate matter, g/dscm (gr/dscf).

Q_sd = Volumetric flow rate of effluent gas, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).

S = Charging rate of dry sludge during the run, kg/hr (ton/hr).

K = Conversion factor, 1.0 g/g (7,000 gr/lb).

(3) The dry sludge charging rate (S) for each run shall be computed using either of the following equations:

Image Not Available

Where:

S = Charging rate of dry sludge, kg/hr (ton/hr).

S_m = Total mass of sludge charge, kg (ton).

R_dm = Average mass of dry sludge per unit mass of sludge charged, kg/kg (ton/ton).

θ = Duration of run, hr.

S_v = Total volume of sludge charged, m³ (gal).

R_dv = Average mass of dry sludge per unit volume of sludge charged, kg/m³ (lb/gal).

K_v = Conversion factor, 1 g/g (2,000 lb/ton).

(4) * * *

Where:

S_m = Total mass of sludge charged to the incinerator during the test run.

S_v = Total volume of sludge charged to the incinerator during the test run.

Q_mi = Average mass flow rate calculated by averaging the flow rates at the beginning and end of each interval “i,” kg/hr (ton/hr).

Q_vi = Average volume flow rate calculated by averaging the flow rates at the beginning and end of each interval “i,” m³/hr (gal/hr).

θ_i = Duration of interval “i,” hr.

57. Paragraph (b)(5)(iii) is amended by revising the words “mg/liter (lb/ft ³) or mg/mg (lb/lb)” to read “kg/m³ (lb/gal) or kg/kg (ton/ton).”

58. In § 60.165, paragraph (d)(2) is amended by revising the words “installed under § 60.163” to read “installed under paragraph (b) of this section.”

59. In § 60.192, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “according to § 60.8 above” to read “according to § 60.195.”

60. Amend § 60.195 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “(mg/dscf)” in the definition of the term “c _s” to read “(gr/dscf)”; and revising the words “(453,600 mg/lb)” in the definition of the term “K” to read “(7,000 gr/lb).”

b. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising the words “(mg/dscf)” in the definition of the symbol “c_s” to read “(gr/dscf)”; and revising the words “(453,600 mg/lb)” in the definition of the symbol “K” to read “(7,000 gr/lb).”

61. In § 60.201 by revising paragraph (c) to read as follows:

62. In § 60.202, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “metric ton” to read “Mg.”

63. In § 60.203, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words “metric ton” to read “Mg.”

64. Amend § 60.204 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “E” to read “Mg”; revising the words “(mg/dscf)” in the definition of the term “c _si” to read “(gr/dscf)”; revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “P” to read “Mg”; and revising the words “(453,600 mg/lb)” in the definition of the term “K” to read “(7,000 gr/lb).”

b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “M_p” to read “Mg.”

65. In § 60.211 by revising paragraph (c) to read as follows:

66. In § 60.212, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “metric ton” to read “megagram (Mg).”

67. In § 60.213, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words “metric ton” to read “Mg.”

68. Amend § 60.214 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “E” to read “Mg”; revising the words “(mg/dscf)” in the definition of the term “c _si” to read “(gr/dscf)”; revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “P” to read “Mg”; and revising the words “(453,600 mg/lb)” in the definition of the term “K” to read “(7,000 gr/lb).”

b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “M _p” to read “Mg.”

69. In § 60.222, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “metric ton” to read “megagram (Mg).”

70. Amend § 60.223 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b) by revising the words “metric ton” to read “Mg.”

b. In paragraph (c), in the first sentence by revising the word “part” to read “subpart.”

71. Amend § 60.224 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “E” to read “Mg”; revising the words “(mg/dscf)” in the definition of the term “c _si” to read “(gr/dscf)”; revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “P” to read “Mg”; and revising the words “(453,600 mg/lb)” in the definition of the term “K” to read “(7,000 gr/lb).”

b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “M _p” to read “Mg.”

72. § 60.232 is amended by removing the paragraph designation and by revising the words “metric ton” to read “megagram (Mg).”

73. § 60.233 is amended by removing the paragraph designation and by revising the words “metric ton” to read “Mg.”

74. Amend § 60.234 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “E” to read “Mg”; revising the words “(mg/dscf)” in the definition of the term “c _si” to read “(gr/dscf)”; revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “P” to read “Mg”; and revising the words “(453,600 mg/lb)” in the definition of the term “K” to read “(7,000 gr/lb).”

b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “M _p” to read “Mg.”

75. In § 60.241, paragraph (c) is amended by italicizing the word “stored.”

76-77. In § 60.242, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “metric ton” to read “megagram (Mg).”

78. Amend § 60.244 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(1) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “E” to read “Mg”; revising the words “(mg/dscf)” in the definition of the term “c _si” to read “(gr/dscf)”; revising the words “metric ton” the words “(453,600 mg/lb)” in the definition of the term “K” to read “(7,000 gr/lb).”

b. In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words “metric ton” in the definition of the term “M _p”to read “Mg.”

79. In § 60.250, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “200 tons” to read “181 Mg (200 tons).”

80. In § 60.251, paragraphs (b) and (c) are amended by revising “D388-77” to read “D388-77, 90, 91, 95, or 98a.”

81. In § 60.252, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words “0.040 g/dscm (0.018 gr/dscf)” to read “0.040 g/dscm (0.017 gr/dscf).”

82. Amend § 60.253 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a)(1), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “±3° Fahrenheit” to read “±1.7 °C (±3 °F).”

b. In paragraph (a)(2)(i), the second sentence is amended by revising the word “gage” to read “gauge.”

83. Amend § 60.261 as follows:

a. Paragraph (n) is amended by revising “ASTM Designation A99-76” to read “ASTM Designation A99-76 or 82 (Reapproved 1987).”

b. Paragraphs (s) and (w) are amended by revising “ASTM Designation A100-69 (Reapproved 1974)” to read “ASTM Designation A100-69, 74, or 93.”

c. Paragraph (q) is amended by revising “ASTM Designation A101-73” to read “ASTM Designation A101-73 or 93.”

d. Paragraph (t) is amended by revising “ASTM Designation A482-76” to read “ASTM Designation A482-76 or 93.”

e. Paragraph (o) is amended by revising “ASTM Designation A483-64 (Reapproved 1974)” to read “ASTM Designation A483-64 or 74 (Reapproved 1988).”

f. Paragraph (v) is amended by revising “ASTM Designation A495-76” to read “ASTM Designation A495-76 or 94.”

84. Amend § 60.266 as follows:

a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words “emissions is quantified” in the definition of the term “n” to read “emissions are quantified”; revising the words “(g/dscf)” in the definition of the term “c _si” to read “(gr/dscf)”; and revising the words “(453.6 g/lb)” in the definition of the term “K” to read “(7000 gr/lb).”

b. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii) is amended by revising the words “5.70 dscm (200 dscf)” to read “5.66 dscm (200 dscf).”

85. Amend § 60.274 as follows:

a-b. Paragraph (a)(4) is amended by revising the words “under paragraph (e) of this section” to read “under paragraph (f) of this section.”

c. In § 60.274, paragraph (i), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “required by § 60.275(c)” to read “required by § 60.276(c).”

d. In § 60.274, by revising paragraph (i)(4) to read as follows:

86. Amend § 60.275 as follows:

a. Paragraph (e)(2) is amended by revising the words “more then one control” to read “more than one control.”

b. Paragraph (e)(4) is amended by revising the words “the test runs shall be conducted concurrently” to read “the Method 9 test runs shall be conducted concurrently with the particulate matter test runs.”

c. In paragraph (i), the fifth sentence is amended by revising the words “In the case, Reference Method 9” to read “In this case, Method 9.”

87. Amend § 60.276 by:

a. Paragraphs (a) and (c)(6)(iv) are revised.

b. In paragraph (b), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “postmarked 30 days prior” to read “postmarked at least 30 days prior.”

The revisions read as follows:

88. Amend § 60.274a by:

a. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is revised, and paragraph (h)(4) is revised.

b. Paragraph (f) is amended by adding the following sentence after the first sentence: “The pressure shall be recorded as 15-minute integrated averages.”

c. In paragraph (h), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “required by § 60.275a(d)” to read “required by § 60.276a(f).”

The revisions read as follows:

89. In § 60.275a, paragraph (e)(4) is amended by revising the words “the test runs shall be conducted concurrently” to read “the Method 9 test runs shall be conducted concurrently with the particulate matter test runs.”

90. Amend § 60.276a as follows:

a. In paragraph (e), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “postmarked 30 days prior” to read “postmarked at least 30 days prior.”

b. Paragraph (f)(6)(iv) is amended by revising as follows:

91. Amend § 60.281 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c) by revising the words “Reference Method 16” to read “Method 16.”

b. In paragraph (d) by revising the words “below tank(s)” to read “blow tank(s).”

c. In paragraph (e) by revising the words “digestion system” to read “digester system.”

92. In § 60.282, paragraph (a)(3)(i) is amended by revising the words “0.15 g/dscm (0.067 gr/dscf)” to read “0.15 g/dscm (0.066 gr/dscf).”

93. Amend § 60.283 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a)(1)(iii) by revising the words “1200°F.” to read “650 °C (1200 °F).”

b. In paragraph (a)(1)(v), in the second sentence by revising the words “5 ppm by volume on a dry basis, corrected to the actual oxygen content of the untreated gas stream” to read “5 ppm by volume on a dry basis, uncorrected for oxygen content.”

c. In paragraph (a)(1)(vi) by revising the words “0.005 g/kg ADP” to read “0.005 g/kg air dried pulp (ADP).”

94. Amend § 60.284 by:

a. In paragraph (a)(2)(ii) by revising the words “20 percent” to read “25 percent”

b. Revising paragraph (c) introductory text.

c. In paragraph (c)(3) by revising the words “Correct all 12-hour average TRS concentrations to 10 volume percent oxygen, except that all 12-hour average TRS concentration from a recovery furnace shall be corrected to 8 volume percent using the following equation:” to read “Using the following equation, correct all 12-hour average TRS concentrations to 10 volume percent oxygen, except that all 12-hour average TRS concentrations from a recovery furnace shall be corrected to 8 volume percent oxygen instead of 10 percent, and all 12-hour average TRS concentrations from a facility to which the provisions of § 60.283(a)(1)(v) apply shall not be corrected for oxygen content:”

d. Paragraph (d)(3)(ii) is amended by revising the words “1200°F” to read “650 °C (1200 °F).”

e. Adding paragraph (f).

The revisions and addition read as follows:

95. Amend § 60.285 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(1) by revising the definition of the term “c _s” to read “c_s = Concentration of particulate matter, g/dscm (lb/dscf).”

b. In paragraph (d)(3) by revising the equation used to calculate “GLS” as follows:

c. In paragraph (e)(1) by revising the definition of “F” to read “F = conversion factor, 0.001417 g H ₂ S/m³-ppm (8.846 × 10⁻⁸ lb H₂ S/ft³-ppm).”

d. In paragraph (f)(1) by revising the words “205 °C (400 °F)” to read “204 °C (400 °F).”

e. Revising paragraph (f)(2).

The revisions read as follows:

96. In § 60.290, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “4,550 kilograms” to read “4.55 Mg (5 tons).”

97. Amend § 60.291 as follows:

a. The second sentence of the definition of the term “Glass melting furnace” is amended by revising the word “appendaees” to read “appendages.”

b. The definition of the term “lead recipe” is amended by revising the chemical formula “Na ₂ M” to read “Na₂ O.”

c. The second sentence of the definition of the term “rebricking” is amended by revising the word “replacment” to read “replacement.”

98. In § 60.292, paragraph (a)(2), the definition of the term STD is amended by revising the words “g of particulate/kg” to read “g of particulate/kg (lb of particulate/ton).”

99. Amend § 60.293 as follows:

a. In paragraph (d)(1) by revising the words “specified in paragraph (b)(1) of this section” to read “specified in paragraph (b) of this section.”

b. Paragraph (e) is redesignated as paragraph (f).

c. Paragraph (d)(3) introductory text is redesignated as paragraph (e); paragraphs (d)(3)(i), (ii), and (iii) are redesignated as paragraphs (e)(1), (2), and (3).

d. Newly designated paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words “120±14°C” to read “120±14°C (248±25°F).

100. Amend § 60.296 as follows:

In paragraph (b)(3) by revising the words “American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) Method D240-76” to read “ASTM Method D240-76 or 92” and by revising “D1826-77” to read “D1826-77 or 94.”

101. In § 60.301, the first paragraph is amended by revising the words “the act” to read “the Act.”

102. Amend § 60.313 as follows:

a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words “Reference Method 24” to read “Method 24” wherever they occur.

b. In paragraph (c)(1)(i)(B), the third sentence is amended by revising the words “other transfer efficiencies other than” to read “transfer efficiencies other than.”

c. Paragraph (c)(2)(i) is amended by revising the words “in (c)(2)(i)(A), (B), and (C)” to read “in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(A), (B), and (C)” wherever they occur.

103. In § 60.315, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the words “Reference Method 24” to read “Method 24.”

104. In § 60.330, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “10.7 gigajoules” to read “10.7 gigajoules (10 million Btu).”

105. In § 60.331, paragraph (s) is removed.

106. In § 60.332, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “the date of the performance test” to read “the date on which the performance test.”

107. In § 60.334, paragraph (c)(3), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “provided in § 60.332(g)” to read “provided in § 60.332(f).”

108. Amend § 60.335 by:

a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words:

“NO_X = emission rate of NO_X at 15 percent O₂ and ISO standard ambient conditions, volume percent.

NO_X = observed NO_X concentration, ppm by volume.”

“NO_X = emission rate of NO_X at 15 percent O2 and ISO standard ambient conditions, ppm by volume.

NO_X = observed NO_X concentration, ppm by volume at 15 percent O₂.”

b. Paragraph (d) is revised.

c. In paragraph (f)(1), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “in paragraph (b)(1) of this section” to read “in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.”

The revisions read as follows:

109. In § 60.343, paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “in which the scrubber pressure drop is greater than 30 percent below the rate established during the performance test” to read “in which the scrubber pressure drop or scrubbing liquid supply pressure is greater than 30 percent below that established during the performance test.”

110. Amend § 60.344 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1), the definition of the term “c _s” is amended by revising the words “(g/dscf)” to read “(gr/dscf).”

b. In paragraph (b)(1), the definition of the term “K” is amended by revising the words “(453.6 g/lb)” to read “(7000 gr/lb).”

c. In paragraph (b)(2), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “Method 5D shall be used as positive-pressure fabric filters” to read “Method 5D shall be used at positive-pressure fabric filters.”

111. Amend § 60.372 as follows;

a. In paragraph (a)(1) by revising the words “0.40 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.000176 gr/dscf)” to read “0.40 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.000175 gr/dscf).”

b. In paragraph (a)(2) by revising the words “1.00 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044 gr/dscf)” to read “1.00 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.000437 gr/dscf).”

c. In paragraph (a)(3) by revising the words “1.00 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044 gr/dscf)” to read “1.00 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.000437 gr/dscf).”

d. In paragraph (a)(5) by revising the words “4.50 milligrams of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00198 gr/dscf)” to read “4.50 milligrams of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00197 gr/dscf).”

e. In paragraph (a)(6) by revising the words “1.00 milligram per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.00044 gr/dscf)” to read “1.00 milligram of lead per dry standard cubic meter of exhaust (0.000437 gr/dscf).”

112. Amend § 60.374 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(1), in the definition of the term “c _Pbi” by revising the words “mg/dscm” to read “mg/dscm (gr/dscf).”

b. In paragraph (c)(1), in the definition of the term “K” by revising the words “453,600 mg/lb” to read “7000 gr/lb).”

113. In § 60.381, in the definition of the term “storage bin” by revising the words “or metallic minerals” to read “of metallic minerals.”

114. In § 60.382, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the words “0.05 grams per dry standard cubic meter” to read “0.05 grams per dry standard cubic meter (0.02 g/dscm).”

115. In § 60.385, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “scrubber pressure loss (or gain) and liquid flow rate” to read “scrubber pressure loss (or gain) or liquid flow rate”.

116. In § 60.386, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “§ 60.3284(a) and (b)” to read “§ 60.384(a) and (b).”

117. Amend § 60.391 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b), the definition of “E” is amended by revising the words “destruction efficiency” to read “destruction or removal efficiency.”

b. In paragraph (b), the eleventh definition is amended by revising the words

“L_ci ^l l = Volume of each coating (i) consumed by each application method (l), as received liters)”

to read

“L_cil = Volume of each coating (i) consumed by each application method (l), as received (liters).”

118. Amend § 60.393 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(1)(i) by revising the words “Reference Method 24” to read “Method 24” wherever they occur.

b. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) is amended by revising the term to read as follows:

Image Not Available

to read as follows:

Image Not Available

119. In § 60.395, paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words “Reference Method 25” to read “Method 25.”

120. In § 60.396, paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), (b), and (c) are amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method.”

121. In § 60.401, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words “unit including, moisture” to read “unit, including moisture.”

122. In § 60.402, paragraph (a)(2)(i) is amended by revising the word “Contains” to read “Contain.”

123. Amend § 60.424 to read as follows:

a. In the first paragraph (b)(3), in the first sentence by revising the words “scales or computed from material balance shall” to read “scales, or the result of computations using a material balance, shall.”

b. The second paragraph (b)(3) is redesignated as (b)(4).

124. In § 60.431, paragraph (b), the definition of the term “L _di” is amended by adding the words “the subject facility (or facilities)” to the end of the definition.

125. Amend § 60.433 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a)(5), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “material or on at least” to read “material on at least.”

b. Paragraph (a)(5)(ii) is amended by revising the punctuation at the end of the paragraph. The words “according to § 60.435.” are revised to read “according to § 60.435;”

c. Paragraphs(b)(1), (b)(2), (b)(3), (b)(5), (c)(2)(ii), and (c)(2)(iii) are amended by adding an “=” between the “i” and the “1” under the summation sign.

d. Paragraph (c)(2)(v) is amended by replacing the “e” subscript with “a” wherever it occurs.

e. Paragraph (e)(5)(ii) is amended by replacing the “a” subscript with “e” wherever it occurs.

a. Paragraphs (a)(1), (a)(2), and (b) are amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

b. Paragraph (d)(1) is amended by revising the words “ASTM D1475-60 (Reapproved 1980)” to read “ASTM D1475-60, 80, or 90.”

128. In § 60.441, paragraphs (a) and (b) are amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

129. Amend § 60.443 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b) by revising the words “R _q less” to read “R_q is less.”

b. In paragraph (d) by revising the words “in paragraph (b)(1) of this section” to read “in paragraph (b) of this section.”

c. In paragraph (e), in the third sentence by revising the words “38°C (50°F)” to read “28°C (50°F).”

d. In paragraph (i) by revising the word “devices” to read “device(s).”

130. In § 60.446, paragraphs (a) and (b) are amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

131. Amend § 60.453 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b) by revising the words “performance text” to read “performance test.”

b. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

c. In paragraph (b)(1)(i)(B) by revising the word “coatings” to read “coating.”

d. In paragraph (b)(1)(i)(C) by revising equation (3).

e. In paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A) and (b)(2)(i)(B) by revising Equations (6) and (7).

f. In paragraph (b)(2)(i)(B) by removing Equation (7) and its nomenclature, adding them to the end of paragraph (b)(2)(i)(A), and redesignating the equation as Equation (6).

g. In paragraph (b)(3)(i) by revising the word “assumed” to read “consumed.”

The revisions reads as follows:

132. In § 60.454, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the words “of the greater of 0.75 percent of the temperature being measured expressed in degrees Celsius or ±2.5°C” to read “of 0.75 percent of the temperature being measured, expressed in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever is greater.”

133. Amend § 60.455 as follows:

a. Paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) are amended by revising the words “28 °C” to read “28 °C” (50 °F)” wherever they occur.

b. In paragraph (d), the first sentence is amended by revising the word “opreator” to read “operator.”

134. Amend § 60.456 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a)(1), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “Reference Method 24” to read “Method 24.”

b. In paragraph (a)(1), the third sentence is amended by revising the words “subsection 4.4 of Method 24” to read “Section 12.6 of Method 24.”

c. Paragraph (a)(4) is amended by revising the word “volocity” to read “velocity.”

d. Paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “0.003 dscm” to read “0.003 dscm (0.1 dscf).”

135. Amend § 60.463 as follows:

a. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words “Reference Method 24” to read “Method 24” wherever they occur.

b. Paragraph (c)(3)(iii) is amended by revising the word “computation” to read “computations.”

c. Paragraph (c)(4)(ii) is amended by revising the defined term “m” to read “n.”

136. In § 60.464, paragraph (c), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “which is greater” to read “whichever is greater.”

137. Amend § 60.465 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is amended by revising the reference “§ 69.462” to read “§ 60.462.”

b. In paragraph (d), the first sentence is amended by revising the reference “§ 69.464” to read “§ 60.464.”

138. Amend § 60.466 as follows:

a. Paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2) are amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

b. In paragraph (a)(1), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “coating for determining the VOC content” to read “coating, shall be used for determining the VOC content.”

c. In paragraph (a)(1), the third sentence is amended by revising the words “section 4.4” to read “Section 12.6.”

d. Paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “0.003 dry standard cubic meter (DSCM)” to read “0.003 dscm (0.11 dscf).”

139. In § 60.471, the definition of the term “Catalyst” is amended by revising the words “means means” to read “means.”

140. Amend § 60.472 as follows:

a. Paragraph (a)(1)(i) is amended by revising the words “0.04 kilograms of particulate per megagram” to read “0.04 kg/Mg (0.08 lb/ton).”

b. Paragraph (a)(1)(ii) is amended by revising the words “0.04 kilograms per megagram” to read “0.04 kg/Mg (0.08 lb/ton).”

c. Paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words “0.67 kilograms of particulate per megagram” to read “0.67 kg/Mg (1.3 lb/ton).”

d. Paragraph (b)(2) is amended by revising the words “0.71 kilograms of particulate per megagram” to read “0.71 kg/Mg (1.4 lb/ton).”

e. Paragraph (b)(3) is amended by revising the words “0.60 kilograms of particulate per megagram” to read “0.60 kg/Mg (1.2 lb/ton).”

f. Paragraph (b)(4) is amended by revising the words “0.64 kilograms of particulate per megagram” to read “0.64 kg/Mg (1.3 lb/ton).”

g. Paragraph (b)(5) is amended by revising the words “procedures in § 60.474(k)” to read “procedures in § 60.474(g).”

141. Amend § 60.473 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “±15°C” to read “±15°C (±25°F).”

b. In paragraph (b), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “±10 °C” to read “±10 °C (±18 °F).”

c. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “(a) and (b)” to read “(a) or (b)”

142. Amend § 60.474 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(1), the definition of the term “E” is amended by revising the words “kg/Mg” to read “kg/Mg (lb/ton).”

b. In paragraph (c)(1), the definition of the term “c _s” is amended by revising the words “(g/dscf)” to read “(gr/dscf).”

c. In paragraph (c)(1), the definition of the term “K” is amended by revising the words “907.2/(g-Mg)/(kg-ton)” to read “7000 gr/lb).”

d. In paragraph (c)(4), the definition of the term “d” is amended by revising the words “llb/ft ³” to read “lb/ft³.”

e. Paragraphs (c)(4)(ii) and (f) are revised.

The revisions read as follows:

143. In § 60.480(d)(2), line 3, revise the words “1,000 Mg/yr” to read “1,000 Mg/yr (1,102 ton/yr)”

144. Amend § 60.481 as follows:

a. Paragraph (a)(1) under the definition of “Capital expenditure” is amended by revising the words “repair allowance, B, as reflected” to “repair allowance, B, divided by 100 as reflected”

b. The definition for “In vacuum service” is amended by revising the words “5 kilopascals (kPa)” to “5 kilopascals (kPa)(0.7 psia).”

c. The definition of the term “Repaired” is amended by revising the words “instrument reading or 10,000 ppm or greater” to read “instrument reading of 10,000 ppm or greater.”

145. Amend § 60.482-2 as follows:

a. Paragraph (e) is amended by revising the words “(a), (c), and (d) if the pump” to read “(a), (c), and (d) of this section if the pump.”

b. Paragraph (e)(3) is amended by revising the words “paragraph (e)(2)” to read “paragraph (e)(2) of this section.”

c. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words “exempt from the paragraphs (a) through (e)” to read “exempt from paragraphs (a) through (e) of this section.”

147. In § 60.482-4, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “paragraphs (a) and (b)” to read “paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.”

148. In § 60.482-5, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “paragraphs (a) and (b).” to read “paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.”

149. In § 60.482-7, paragraph (f)(3) is amended by revising the words “paragraph (f)(2)” to read “paragraph (f)(2) of this section.”

150. In § 60.482-10, paragraph (c) is amended by revising the words “temperature of 816 °C” to read “temperature of 816 °C (1500 °F).”

151. In § 60.483-1, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words “specified in § 60.487(b)” to read “specified in § 60.487(d).”

152. In § 60.483-2, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the words “specified in § 60.487(b)” to read “specified in § 60.487(d).”

153. In § 60.484, paragraph (f)(2) is amended by revising the words “paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and (e)” to read “paragraphs (b), (c), (d), and (e) of this section.”

154. Amend § 60.485 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(2), in the third sentence by revising the word “indicates” is revised to read “indicated.”

b. In paragraph (d), in the first sentence by revising the words “in VOC series” to read “in VOC service.”

c. In paragraph (d)(1) by revising the words “ASTM E-260, E-168, E-169” to read “ASTM E260-73, 91, or 96, E168-67, 77, or 92, E169-63, 77, or 93.”

d. In paragraphs (e)(1) and (e)(2) by revising the words “0.3 kPa at 20°C” to read “0.3 kPa at 20 °C (1.2 in. H ₂ O at 68 °F)” wherever they occur.

e. In paragraph (e)(1) by revising “ASTM D-2879” to read “ASTM D2879-83, 96, or 97.”

f. In paragraph (f) by revising the words “paragraphs (d), (e), and (g)” to read “paragraphs (d), (e), and (g) of this section.”

g. Paragraphs (g)(3) and (g)(4) are revised.

h. In paragraph (g)(5) by revising “ASTM D 2504-67” to read “ASTM D2504-67, 77, or 88 (Reapproved 1993).”

i. In paragraph (g)(6) by revising “ASTM D 2382-76” to read “ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or D4809-95.”

The revisions read as follows:

156. In § 60.487, paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words “An owner or operator electing to comply with the provisions of §§ 60.483-1 and 60.483-2” to read “An owner or operator electing to comply with the provisions of §§ 60.483-1 or 60.483-2.”

157. Amend the table in § 60.489 as follows:

a. Revise the chemical name “Chlorbenzoyl chloride” to read “Chlorobenzoyl chloride;”

b. Revise the chemical name “Chloronapthalene” to read “Chloronaphthalene;”

c. Revise the CAS No. for diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate to read 124-17-4;

d. Revise the chemical name “Ethylne carbonate” to read “Ethylene carbonate;”

e. Revise the chemical name “Ethylene glycol monoethy ether” to read “Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether;”

f. Revise the chemical name “Propional dehyde” to read “Propionaldehyde;” and

g. Revise the chemical name “Tetrahydronapthalene” to read “Tetrahydronaphthalene.”

158. In § 60.491, paragraphs (a)(6) and (b) are amended by revising the word “litre” or “litres” to read “liter” or “liters” wherever it occurs.

159. Amend § 60.493 as follows:

a. Paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

b. Paragraph (b)(1)(i)(C) is amended by revising the words “volume-weighed average” to read “volume-weighted average.”

c. In paragraph (b)(1)(i)(C), equation 3 is revised.

d. Paragraph (b)(1)(iii) is amended by revising the words “weighted average of mass of VOC” to read “weighted average mass of VOC.”

The revisions read as follows:

161. In § 60.495, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the words “from data determined using Reference Method 24 or supplies” to read “from data determined using Method 24 or supplied.”

162. Revise § 60.496 as follows:

a. Paragraph (a)(1) is revised.

b. In paragraphs (a)(2), (b), and (c) by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

c. In paragraph (a)(2) by revising the words “30 days in advance” to read “at least 30 days in advance.”

The revisions read as follows:

163. In § 60.501, the definition of “Vapor-tight gasoline tank truck” is amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method.”

164. Amend § 60.531 as follows:

a. Under the definition of “Coal-only heater”, the alphabetical designations of paragraphs (a) through (e) are removed and numerical designations (1) through (5) are added.

b. Under the definition of “Cookstove”, the alphabetical designations of paragraphs (a) through (g) are removed and numerical designations (1) through (7) are added.

c. Under the definition of “Wood heater”, paragraph (2) is amended by revising the words “20 cubic feet” to read “0.57 cubic meters (20 cubic feet).”

d. Under the definition of “Wood heater”, paragraph (3) is amended by revising the words “5 kg/hr” to read “5 kg/hr (11 lb/hr).”

e. Under the definition of “Wood heater”, paragraph (4) is amended by revising the words “800 kg” to read “800 kg (1,760 lb).”

165. Amend § 60.532 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1) by revising the words “4.1 g/hr” to read “4.1 g/hr (0.009 lb/hr).”

b. Paragraphs (b)(1)(i), (b)(1)(ii), and (b)(2) are revised.

The revisions read as follows:

166. Amend § 60.533 as follows:

a. In paragraph (k)(1), the third sentence is amended by revising the words “The grant of such a waiver” to read “The granting of such a waiver.”

b. Paragraph (k)(2) is amended by revising the words “± 1/4 inch” to read “± 0.64 cm (± 1/4 inch).”

c. In paragraph (o)(4), the first sentence is amended by revising the word “indicate” to read “indicates.”

d. In paragraph (o)(4), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “comply with applicable emission limit” to read “comply with the applicable emission limit.”

e. In paragraph (p)(4)(ii)(A), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “± 1 gram per hour” to read “± 1 gram per hour (± 0.0022 lb per hour).”

167. In § 60.535, paragraph (b)(9) is amended by revising the words “a reporting and recordkeeping requirements” to read “reporting and recordkeeping requirements.”

168. Amend § 60.536 as follows:

a. Paragraph (a)(3)(ii) and the equation in (i)(4)(ii) are revised.

b. Paragraph (j)(2)(v) is amended by revising the words “five inches by seven inches” to read “12.7 centimeters by 17.8 centimeters (5 inches by 7 inches).”

The revisions read as follows:

169. Amend § 60.541 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms “D _c” and “D_r” are amended by revising the words “(grams per liter)” to read “(grams per liter (lb per gallon)).”

b. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms “G” and “N” are amended by revising the words “(grams per tire)” to read “(grams (lb) per tire).”

c. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms “G _b” and “N_b” are amended by revising the words “(grams per bead)” to read “(grams (lb) per bead).”

d. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms “L _c” and “L_r” are amended by revising the word “(liters)” to read “(liters (gallons)).”

e. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms “M”, “M _o”, and “M_r” are amended by revising the word “(grams)” to read “(grams (lb)).”

f. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms “Q _a”, “Q_b”, and “Q_f” are amended by revising the words “(dry standard cubic meters per hour)” to read “(dry standard cubic meters (dry standard cubic feet) per hour).”

170. Amend § 60.542 as follows:

a. Paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(A) through (E), (a)(2)(ii)(A) through (E), (a)(6)(ii)(A) through (E), (a)(8)(ii)(A) through (E), and (a)(9)(ii)(A) through (E) are revised.

b. In paragraph (a)(3) by revising the words “no more than 10 grams of VOC per tire (g/tire)” to read “no more than 10 grams (0.022 lb) of VOC per tire.”

c. In paragraph (a)(4) by revising the words “no more than 5 grams of VOC per bead (g/bead)” to read “no more than 5 grams (0.011 lb) of VOC per bead.”

d. In paragraph (a)(5)(i) by revising the words “1.2 grams of VOC per tire” to read “1.2 grams (0.0026 lb) of VOC per tire.”

e. In paragraph (a)(5)(ii) by revising the words “9.3 grams of VOC per tire” to read “9.3 grams (0.021 lb) of VOC per tire.”

f. In paragraph (a)(7)(i) by revising the words “1.2 grams of VOC per tire” to read “1.2 grams (0.0026 lb) of VOC per tire.”

g. In paragraph (a)(7)(ii) by revising the words “9.3 grams of VOC per tire” to read “9.3 grams (0.021 lb) of VOC per tire.”

The revisions read as follows:

171. In § 60.542a, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “25 grams” to read “25 grams (0.055 lb)” wherever they occur.

172. Amend § 60.543 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c), the first sentence is amended by deleting the abbreviation “(kg/mo).”

b. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words “the g/tire limit” to read “the VOC emission per tire limit.”

c. Paragraph (e) is amended by revising the words “g/bead limit” to read “VOC emission per bead limit.”

d. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising the words “operation that use” to read “operation that uses.”

e. Paragraphs (f)(2)(iv)(G) and (f)(2)(iv)(H) are amended by revising the definitions of the terms “W”, “V”, “Q _i”, and “M_i” following the equations as follows:

W = Molecular weight of the single VOC, mg/mg-mole (lb/lb-mole).

V = The volume occupied by one mole of ideal gas at standard conditions [20°C, 760 mm Hg] on a wet basis, 2.405 × 10⁻⁵ m³/mg-mole (385.3 ft³/lb-mole).

Q_i = Volumetric flow in the capture system during run i, on a wet basis, adjusted to standard conditions, m³ (ft³) (see § 60.547(a)(5)).

M_i = Mass of the single VOC used during run i, mg (lb).

f. Paragraphs (g) and (i) are amended by revising the words “operation that use” to read “operation that uses” wherever they occur.

g. Paragraphs (j)(4) and (j)(5)(ii) are amended by revising the words “100 feet per minute” to read “30.5 meters (100 feet) per minute” wherever they occur.

h. Paragraphs (n) and (n)(5) are amended by revising the words “25 g/tire limit” to read “VOC emission per tire limit” wherever they occur.

173. In § 60.544, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the word “temperatrue” to read “temperature.”

174. Amend § 60.545 as follows:

a. Paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words “28 °C” to read “28 °C (50 °F).”

b. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words “specified kg/mo uncontrolled VOC use” to read “specified VOC monthly usage.”

c. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising the citation “§ 60.543(B)(4)” to read “§ 60.543(b)(4).”

175. Amend § 60.546 as follows:

a. Paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “green tires spraying operation where organic solvent-based spray are used” to read “green tire spraying operation where organic solvent-based sprays are used.”

b. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words “kg/mo uncontrolled VOC use” to read “VOC monthly usage.”

c. Paragraph (c)(1) is amended by revising the words “the number days” to read “the number of days.”

d. Paragraphs (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(5) are amended by revising the words “g/tire or g/bead limit” to read “VOC emission limit per tire or per bead” wherever they occur.

e. In paragraph (d), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “(kg/hr)” to read “(kg/hr or lb/hr).”

f. Paragraph (f)(1) is amended by revising the words “g/tire or g/bead limit” to read “VOC emission limit per tire or per bead.”

g. Paragraph (f)(2) is amended by revising the words “kg/mo VOC use” to read “monthly VOC usage.”

h. In paragraph (j), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “shall be reported within 30 days” to read “shall be reported within 30 days of the change.”

176. Amend § 60.547 as follows:

a. Paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(5) are amended by revising the words “notify the Administrator 30 days in advance” to read “notify the Administrator at least 30 days in advance” wherever they occur.

b. Paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(5) are amended by revising the words “1 meter” to read “1.0 meter (3.3 feet)” wherever they occur.

c. Paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(5)(i) are amended by revising the words “0.003 dry standard cubic meter” to read “0.003 dry standard cubic meter (dscm) (0.11 dry standard cubic feet (dscf))” wherever they occur.

177. Amend § 60.560 as follows:

a. Paragraph (a)(4)(i) is amended by revising the words “1,000 Mg/yr” to read “1,000 Mg/yr (1,102 ton/yr).”

b. In paragraph (b), Table 1 is revised to read as follows:

c. In paragraph (d), Table 2 is revised.

d. Paragraph (g) is amended by revising the words “1.6 Mg/yr” to read “1.6 Mg/yr (1.76 ton/yr)” wherever they occur.

The revision reads as follows:

(d) * * *

178. Amend § 60.561 as follows:

a. The definition of “End finisher” is amended as revising the words “2 torr” in the first sentence to read “2 mm Hg (1 in. H ₂ O)”; and by revising the words “between 5 and 10 torr” in the second sentence to read “between 5 and 10 mm Hg (3 and 5 in. H₂ O).”

b. The definition of “High density polyethylene (HDPE)” is amended by revising the words “0.940 g/cm ³” to read “0.940 gm/cm³ 3 (58.7 lb/ft³).”

c. The definition of “High pressure process” is amended by revising the words “15,000 psig” to read “15,000 psig (103,000 kPa gauge).”

d. The definition of “Low density polyethylene (LDPE)” is amended by revising the words “0.940 g/cm ³” to read “0.940 g/cm³ (58.7 lb/ft³).”

e. The definition of “Low pressure process” is amended by revising the words “300 psig” to read “300 psig (2,070 kPa gauge).”

179. Amend § 60.562-1 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a)(1)(iii), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “18.2 Mg/yr” to read “18.2 Mg/yr (20.1 ton/yr).”

b. Paragraph (b)(1)(i) is amended by revising the words “0.0036 kg TOC/Mg” to read “0.0036 kg TOC/Mg (0.0072 lb TOC/ton).”

c. Paragraph (c)(1)(i)(A) is amended by revising the words “0.018 kg TOC/Mg” to read “0.018 kg TOC/Mg (0.036 lb TOC/ton).”

d. Paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(A) is amended by revising the words “0.02 kg TOC/Mg” to read “0.02 kg TOC/Mg (0.04 lb TOC/ton).”

e. Paragraph (c)(1)(ii)(C) is amended by inserting a comma after the word “weight”.

f. Paragraph (c)(2)(i) is amended by revising the words “0.04 kg TOC/Mg” to read “0.04 kg TOC/Mg (0.08 lb TOC/ton).”

g. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(A) is amended by revising the words “0.02 kg TOC/Mg” to read “0.02 kg TOC/Mg (0.04 lb TOC/ton).”

h. Paragraph (c)(2)(ii)(C) is amended by inserting a comma after the word “weight”.

180. In § 60.562-2, paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words “150 °C as determined by ASTM Method D86-78” to read “150 °C (302 °F) as determined by ASTM Method D86-78, 82, 90, 95, or 96.”

181. Amend § 60.564 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(1), the definitions of the terms “E _inlet” and “E_outlet” are amended by revising the words “kg TOC/hr” to read “kg TOC/hr (lb TOC/hr)” wherever they occur.

b. In Paragraphs (d)(1), (f) introductory text, and (j)(1)(iv), the equations and definitions are revised; and paragraphs (g)(2) and (g)(3) are revised.

c. Paragraph (f)(1) is amended by revising “ASTM D1946-77” to read “ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).”

d. Paragraph (f)(3) is amended by revising “ASTM D2382-76” to read “ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or D4809-95.”

e. In paragraph (h) designate the second paragraph as (h)(1), redesignate existing paragraphs (h)(1) and (h)(2) as paragraphs (h)(2) and (h)(3) and revise the equations and definitions in newly redesignated paragraph (h)(1).

f. Paragraph (h)(3) is amended by revising the words “The rate of polymer produced, P _p (kg/hr), shall be determined by dividing the weight of polymer pulled in kilograms (kg) from the process line during the performance test by the number of hours (hr) taken to perform the performance test. The polymer pulled, in kilograms, shall” to read “The rate of polymer production, P_p, shall be determined by dividing the weight of polymer pulled (in kg (lb)) from the process line during the performance test by the number of hours taken to perform the performance test. The weight of polymer pulled shall.”

g. Paragraph (j)(1) introductory text is amended by revising “ASTM D2908-74” to read “ASTM D2908-74 or 91.”

h. Paragraph (j)(1)(i) is amended by revising “ASTM D3370-76” to read “ASTM D3370-76 or 96a.”

The revisions read as follows:

(3) The maximum permitted velocity, V_max, for air-assisted flares shall be determined by the following equation:

Where:

V_max = Maximum permitted velocity, m/sec (ft/sec).

K₆ = 8.706 m/sec (metric units)

= 28.56 ft/sec (English units)

K₇ = 0.7084 [(m/sec)/MJ/scm)] (metric units)

= 0.00245 [(ft/sec)/Btu/scf)] (English units)

H_T = The net heating value as determined in paragraph (f) of this section, MJ/scm (Btu/scf).

(h) * * *

(i) * * *

Where:

ER_TOC = Emission rate of total organic compounds (minus methane and ethane), kg TOC/Mg (lb TOC/ton) product

E_TOC = Emission rate of total organic compounds (minus methane and ethane) in the sample, kg/hr (lb/hr)

P_p = The rate of polymer production, kg/hr (lb/hr)

K₅ = 1,000 kg/Mg (metric units)

= 2,000 lb/ton (English units)

(j) * * *

(1) * * *

(iv) * * *

Where:

X_i = daily ethylene glycol concentration for each day used to calculate the 14-day rolling average used in test results to justify implementing the reduced testing program.

n = number of ethylene glycol concentrations.

182. Amend § 60.565 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a)(1)(ii), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “kilograms TOC (minus methane and ethane) per megagram of product” to read “kg TOC (minus methane and ethane) per Mg (lb TOC/ton) of product.”

b. In paragraph (a)(2)(ii) by revising the word “boiler” to read “boilers.”

c. In paragraph (f)(1)(i) by removing the words “are exceeded.”

183. Amend § 60.581 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a), the definition of the term “ink solids” is amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method.”

b. In paragraph (b), the definitions of the terms “W _oi”, “W_si”, and “W_oj” are amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

184. Amend § 60.583 as follows:

a. In paragraph (a) introductory text by revising the words “Reference Methods” to read “Methods.”

b. In paragraphs (a)(1), (b)(4), (b)(5), (c)(2), (c)(3), and (c)(4) by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

185. Amend § 60.584 as follows:

a. In paragraphs (b)(1) and (c)(1) by revising the words “of ±0.75 percent of the temperature being measured or ±2.5° C” to read “of ±0.75 percent of the temperature being measured, expressed in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5° C.”

b. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising the words “more than 28° C” to read “more than 28° C (50° F).”

186. Amend § 60.593 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising “ASTM E-260, E-168, or E-169” to read “ASTM E260-73, 91, or 96, E168-67, 77, or 92, or E169-63, 77, or 93.”

b. In paragraph (d) by revising “ASTM Method D86” to read “ASTM Method D86-78, 82, 90, 95, or 96.”

187. In § 60.600, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “500 megagrams” to read “500 Mg (551 ton).”

188. Amend § 60.602 as follows:

a. By removing the paragraph designation “(a)”.

b. In the first sentence, by revising the words “10 kilograms (kg) VOC per megagram (Mg)” to read “10 kg/Mg (20 lb/ton).”

c. In the second sentence, by revising the words “10 kg VOC per Mg” to read “10 kg/Mg (20 lb/ton).”

d. In the third sentence by revising the words “17 kg VOC per Mg” to read “17 kg/Mg (34 lb/ton).”

189. Amend § 60.603 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b) introductory text, the first sentence is amended by revising the words “VOC emissions per Mg solvent feed” to read “VOC emissions per unit mass solvent feed.”

b. In paragraph (b)(2) by revising the second equation and by revising the definitions following the equations.

c. Paragraph (b)(2)(i) is redesignated as paragraph (b)(3), and newly redesignated paragraph (b)(3) is amended by revising the words “13 kg per Mg solvent feed” to read “13 kg/Mg (26 lb/ton) solvent feed.”

The revisions read as follows:

190. In § 60.604, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words “500 megagrams” to read “500 Mg (551 ton)” wherever they occur.

191. Amend § 60.613 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c) introductory text by revising the words “in the following equipment” to read “the following equipment.”

b. Paragraphs (d) and (e) are redesignated as (e) and (f).

c. Paragraph (c)(3) is redesignated as paragraph (d).

192. Amend § 60.614 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(4)(ii), the definitions of the terms “E _i” and “E_o” are amended by revising the term “kg TOC/hr” to read “kg/hr (lb/hr).”

b. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definition of the terms “Q _i, Q_o” is amended by revising the units “dscf/hr” to read “dscf/min.”

c. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definition of the term “K ₂” is revised.

d. Paragraphs (b)(5), (c), (d), (e), and (f) are redesignated as paragraphs (c), (d), (e), (f), and (g), respectively.

e. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the second sentence is amended by revising “§ 60.614(d)(2) and (3)” to read “§ 60.614(e)(2) and (3)” and by revising the section reference “(d)(1)(ii)” to read “(e)(1)(ii).”

f. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the last sentence is amended by revising the words “4 inches” to read “10 centimeters (4 inches).”

g. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(ii)(C), the second sentence is amended by revising “§ 60.614(d)(4) and (5)” to read “§ 60.614(e)(4) and (5).”

h. Newly redesignated paragraph (e)(2)(ii) is amended by revising “ASTM D1946-77” to read “D1946-77, or 90 (Reapproved 1994).”

i. In newly redesignated paragraphs (e)(4) and (e)(5), the definitions of the equation terms are revised.

j. Newly redesignated paragraphs (f)(1)(i), including Table 1, and (f)(1)(ii) are revised.

k. In newly redesignated paragraph (f)(2) the definitions of the equation terms and Table 2 are revised.

The revisions read as follows:

193. Amend § 60.615 as follows:

a. In paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “44 MW” to read “44 MW (150 million Btu/hour).”

b. In paragraph (g), the first sentence is amended by revising “§ 60.613(c)” to read “§ 60.613(e).”

194. In § 60.620, paragraph (b), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “4,700 gallons” to read “17,791 liters (4,700 gallons).”

195. In § 60.624, the third sentence is amended by revising the words “is from the outlet” to read “is the outlet.”

196. Amend § 60.632 as follows:

a. In paragraph (f), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “percent VOC content” to read “VOC content.”

b. Paragraph (f) is amended by revising “ASTM Methods E169, E168, or E260” to read “ASTM E169-63, 77, or 93, E168-67, 77, or 92, or E260-73, 91, or 96.”

197. Amend § 60.633 as follows:

a. Paragraph (b)(4)(i) is amended by revising “§ 60.482-(b)(1)” to read “§ 60.482-4(b)(1).”

b. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words “283,000 standard cubic meters per day (scmd) (10 million standard cubic feet per day (scfd))” to read “283,200 standard cubic meters per day (10 million standard cubic feet per day).”

c. Paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) are amended by revising the words “at 150 °C” to read “at 150 °C (302 °F).”

d. Paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) are amended by revising the words “ASTM Method D86” to read “ASTM Method D86-78, 82, 90, 95, or 96.”

198. Amend § 60.641 as follows:

a. The definition for “Total SO ₂” is amended by revising the words “(ppmv or kg/DSCM)” to read “(ppmv or kg/dscm (lb/dscf)).”

b. The definitions for “E”, “S”, and “X” are amended to read as follows:

199. Amend § 60.644 as follows:

a. Paragraphs (b)(1), (c)(3), and (c)(4)(iii) are revised.

b. In paragraph (b)(2), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “dscf/day” to read “dscm/day (dscf/day).”

c. In paragraph (c)(2), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “kg/hr” to read “kg/hr (lb/hr).”

d. In the paragraph (c)(4) introductory text, the first sentence is revised.

e. Paragraph (c)(4)(i) is amended by deleting the words “in mg/dscm” in the third sentence and by revising the last sentence.

f. In paragraph (c)(4)(ii), the last sentence is revised.

g. In paragraph (c)(4)(iv), the fifth sentence is amended by revising the words “(0.35 dscf)” to read “(3.5 dscf).”

h. Paragraph (d) is amended by revising the words “(b) of (c)” to read “(b) or (c).”

The revisions read as follows:

200. Amend § 60.646 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(1), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “(kg/hr)” to read “(kg/hr (lb/hr)).”

b. In paragraph (c), the second sentence is amended by revising the words “(kg/hr)” to read “(kg/hr (lb/hr)).”

c. In paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “150 LT/D” to read “152 Mg/D (150 LT/D).”

d. In paragraph (e), the equation and definitions are amended by revising as follows:

201. Amend § 60.663 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c) introductory text by revising the words “in the following equipment” to read “the following equipment.”

b. Paragraphs (d) and (e) are redesignated as (e) and (f) and paragraph (c)(3) is redesignated as paragraph (d).

c. In newly redesignated paragraph (f) by revising the words “carbon absorber” to read “carbon adsorber.”

202. Amend § 60.664 as follows:

a. In paragraph (b)(4)(ii), the definitions of the terms “E _i” and “E_o” are amended by revising the term “kg TOC/hr” to read “kg/hr (lb/hr).”

b. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definitions of the terms “Q _i” and “Q_o” are amended by revising the units “dscf/hr” to read “dscf/min.”

c. In paragraph (b)(4)(iii), the definition of the term “K ₂” is revised.

d. Paragraphs (b)(5), (c), (d), (e), (f), and (g) are redesignated as paragraphs (c), (d), (e), (f), (g), and (h), respectively.

e. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the second sentence is amended by revising “§ 60.664(d)(2) and (3)” to read “§ 60.664(e)(2) and (3).”

f. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the second sentence is amended by revising “(d)(1)(ii)” to read “(e)(1)(ii).”

g. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(i), the third sentence is amended by revising the words “4 inches” to read “10 centimeters (4 inches).”

h. In newly redesignated paragraph (e)(1)(ii)(C), the second sentence is amended by revising “§ 60.664(d)(4) and (5)” to read “§ 60.664(e)(4) and (5).”

i. Newly redesignated paragraph (e)(2)(ii) is amended by revising “ASTM D1946-77” to read “ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).”

j. In newly redesignated paragraphs (e)(4), (e)(5) and (f)(2), the equation definitions are revised; and newly redesignated paragraphs (f)(1)(i), (f)(1)(ii) including Table 1, and Table 2 of (f)(2)are revised.

k. The last sentence in the newly redesignated paragraph (e)(4) is amended by revising “ASTM D2382-76” to read “ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or D4809-95.”

The revisions read as follows:

203. Amend § 60.665 as follows:

a. Paragraph (b)(4)(i) is amended by revising the word “adsorbing” to read “absorbing.”

b. In paragraph (e), the first sentence is amended by revising the words “44 MW” to read “44 MW (150 million Btu/hour).”

c. In paragraph (g), the first sentence is amended by revising the section reference “§ 60.663(d)” to read “§ 60.663(e).”

d. Paragraph (i) is amended by revising the words “0.008 m ³/min” to read “0.008 scm/min (0.3 scf/min).”

e. In paragraph (l)(6), the fourth sentence is amended by revising the words “vent stream flow rate, heating value, E _TOC” to read “vent stream flow rate, heating value, and E_TOC.”

f. Paragraph (n) is amended by revising the word “capcity” to read “capacity.”

204. In § 60.672, paragraph (a)(1) is amended by revising the words “0.05 g/dscm” to read “0.05 g/dscm (0.022 gr/dscf).”

205. In § 60.676, paragraphs (a)(1)(i), (a)(4)(i), and (a)(4)(ii) are amended by revising the word “tons” to read “megagrams or tons” wherever it occurs.

206. Amend § 60.685 as follows:

a. In paragraph (c)(1), the equation definitions are revised.

b. In paragraph (c)(2) by revising the words “2.55 dscm (90 dscf)” to read “2.55 dscm (90.1 dscf).”

c. In paragraph (c)(3)(i) by revising the words “ASTM Standard Test Method D2584-68 (Reapproved 1979)” to read “ASTM D2584-68 (Reapproved 1985) or 94.”

The revisions read as follows:

207. In § 60.692-3, paragraph (b) is amended by revising the words “16 liters per second (250 gpm)” to read “16 liters per second (250 gallons per minute (gpm)).”

208. In § 60.695, paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) are amended by revising the words “an accuracy of 1 percent of the temperature being measured in °C or ±0.5 °C (±1.0 °F), whichever is greater” to read “an accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being measured, expressed in °C, or ±0.5 °C (0.9 °F), whichever is greater.”

209. Amend § 60.697 by adding paragraph (k) as follows:

210. Amend § 60.704 as follows:

a. Paragraph (d)(2)(ii) is amended by revising “ASTM D1946-77” to read “ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).”

b. The definition of “C _j” in paragraph (d)(4) is amended by revising “ASTM D1946-77” to read “ASTM D1946-77 or 90 (Reapproved 1994).”

c. The definition of “H _j” in paragraph (d)(4) is amended by revising “ASTM D2382-76” to read “ASTM D2382-76 or 88 or D4809-95.”

211. In § 60.723, paragraph (b)(1) is amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method” wherever they occur.

212. In § 60.724, paragraph (a)(2) is amended by revising the words “Reference Method” to read “Method.”

213. In § 60.732, paragraph (a) is amended by revising the words “0.057 g/dscm for dryers” to read “0.057 g/dscm (0.025 gr/dscf) for dryers.”

214. In § 60.753, paragraph (c)(2) introductory text is amended by revising the words “Method 3A” to read “Method 3A or 3C.”

215. Amend § 60.754 as follows;

a. In paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (a)(1)(ii), the equations are amended by revising “C _NM OC” to read “C_NMOC.”

b. In paragraph (a)(3), the introductory text is revised; and in paragraph (d), the first sentence is removed and three sentences are added in its place to read as follows:

216. In Part 60, Appendix A is amended by revising Methods 1, 1A, 2, 2A, 2B, 2C, 2D, 2E, 3, 3B, 4, 5, 5A, 5B, 5D, 5E, 5F, 5G, 5H, 6, 6A, 6B, 7, 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 8, 10A, 10B, 11, 12, 13A, 13B, 14, 15, 15A, 16, 16A, 16B, 17, 18, 19, 21, 22, 24, 24A, 25, 25A, 25B, 25C, 25D, 25E, 26, 26A, 27, 28, 28A, and 29 to read as follows:

METHOD 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test method: Method 2.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of the method is to provide guidance for the selection of sampling ports and traverse points at which sampling for air pollutants will be performed pursuant to regulations set forth in this part. Two procedures are presented: a simplified procedure, and an alternative procedure (see Section 11.5). The magnitude of cyclonic flow of effluent gas in a stack or duct is the only parameter quantitatively measured in the simplified procedure.

1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable to gas streams flowing in ducts, stacks, and flues. This method cannot be used when: (1) the flow is cyclonic or swirling; or (2) a stack is smaller than 0.30 meter (12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m² (113 in.²) in cross-sectional area. The simplified procedure cannot be used when the measurement site is less than two stack or duct diameters downstream or less than a half diameter upstream from a flow disturbance.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

Note:

The requirements of this method must be considered before construction of a new facility from which emissions are to be measured; failure to do so may require subsequent alterations to the stack or deviation from the standard procedure. Cases involving variants are subject to approval by the Administrator.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 This method is designed to aid in the representative measurement of pollutant emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate from a stationary source. A measurement site where the effluent stream is flowing in a known direction is selected, and the cross-section of the stack is divided into a number of equal areas. Traverse points are then located within each of these equal areas.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies.

6.1 Apparatus. The apparatus described below is required only when utilizing the alternative site selection procedure described in Section 11.5 of this method.

6.1.1 Directional Probe. Any directional probe, such as United Sensor Type DA Three-Dimensional Directional Probe, capable of measuring both the pitch and yaw angles of gas flows is acceptable. Before using the probe, assign an identification number to the directional probe, and permanently mark or engrave the number on the body of the probe. The pressure holes of directional probes are susceptible to plugging when used in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, a procedure for cleaning the pressure holes by “back-purging” with pressurized air is required.

6.1.2 Differential Pressure Gauges. Inclined manometers, U-tube manometers, or other differential pressure gauges (e.g., magnehelic gauges) that meet the specifications described in Method 2, Section 6.2.

Note:

If the differential pressure gauge produces both negative and positive readings, then both negative and positive pressure readings shall be calibrated at a minimum of three points as specified in Method 2, Section 6.2.

7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]

9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]

10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]

11.0 Procedure

11.1 Selection of Measurement Site.

11.1.1 Sampling and/or velocity measurements are performed at a site located at least eight stack or duct diameters downstream and two diameters upstream from any flow disturbance such as a bend, expansion, or contraction in the stack, or from a visible flame. If necessary, an alternative location may be selected, at a position at least two stack or duct diameters downstream and a half diameter upstream from any flow disturbance.

11.1.2 An alternative procedure is available for determining the acceptability of a measurement location not meeting the criteria above. This procedure described in Section 11.5 allows for the determination of gas flow angles at the sampling points and comparison of the measured results with acceptability criteria.

11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse Points.

11.2.1 Particulate Traverses.

11.2.1.1 When the eight- and two-diameter criterion can be met, the minimum number of traverse points shall be: (1) twelve, for circular or rectangular stacks with diameters (or equivalent diameters) greater than 0.61 meter (24 in.); (2) eight, for circular stacks with diameters between 0.30 and 0.61 meter (12 and 24 in.); and (3) nine, for rectangular stacks with equivalent diameters between 0.30 and 0.61 meter (12 and 24 in.).

11.2.1.2 When the eight- and two-diameter criterion cannot be met, the minimum number of traverse points is determined from Figure 1-1. Before referring to the figure, however, determine the distances from the measurement site to the nearest upstream and downstream disturbances, and divide each distance by the stack diameter or equivalent diameter, to determine the distance in terms of the number of duct diameters. Then, determine from Figure 1-1 the minimum number of traverse points that corresponds: (1) to the number of duct diameters upstream; and (2) to the number of diameters downstream. Select the higher of the two minimum numbers of traverse points, or a greater value, so that for circular stacks the number is a multiple of 4, and for rectangular stacks, the number is one of those shown in Table 1-1.

11.2.2 Velocity (Non-Particulate) Traverses. When velocity or volumetric flow rate is to be determined (but not particulate matter), the same procedure as that used for particulate traverses (Section 11.2.1) is followed, except that Figure 1-2 may be used instead of Figure 1-1.

11.3 Cross-Sectional Layout and Location of Traverse Points.

11.3.1 Circular Stacks.

11.3.1.1 Locate the traverse points on two perpendicular diameters according to Table 1-2 and the example shown in Figure 1-3. Any equation (see examples in References 2 and 3 in Section 16.0) that gives the same values as those in Table 1-2 may be used in lieu of Table 1-2.

11.3.1.2 For particulate traverses, one of the diameters must coincide with the plane containing the greatest expected concentration variation (e.g., after bends); one diameter shall be congruent to the direction of the bend. This requirement becomes less critical as the distance from the disturbance increases; therefore, other diameter locations may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

11.3.1.3 In addition, for elliptical stacks having unequal perpendicular diameters, separate traverse points shall be calculated and located along each diameter. To determine the cross-sectional area of the elliptical stack, use the following equation:

Square Area = D₁ × D₂ × 0.7854

Where: D₁ = Stack diameter 1

D₂ = Stack diameter 2

11.3.1.4 In addition, for stacks having diameters greater than 0.61 m (24 in.), no traverse points shall be within 2.5 centimeters (1.00 in.) of the stack walls; and for stack diameters equal to or less than 0.61 m (24 in.), no traverse points shall be located within 1.3 cm (0.50 in.) of the stack walls. To meet these criteria, observe the procedures given below.

11.3.2 Stacks With Diameters Greater Than 0.61 m (24 in.).

11.3.2.1 When any of the traverse points as located in Section 11.3.1 fall within 2.5 cm (1.0 in.) of the stack walls, relocate them away from the stack walls to: (1) a distance of 2.5 cm (1.0 in.); or (2) a distance equal to the nozzle inside diameter, whichever is larger. These relocated traverse points (on each end of a diameter) shall be the “adjusted” traverse points.

11.3.2.2 Whenever two successive traverse points are combined to form a single adjusted traverse point, treat the adjusted point as two separate traverse points, both in the sampling and/or velocity measurement procedure, and in recording of the data.

11.3.3 Stacks With Diameters Equal To or Less Than 0.61 m (24 in.). Follow the procedure in Section 11.3.1.1, noting only that any “adjusted” points should be relocated away from the stack walls to: (1) a distance of 1.3 cm (0.50 in.); or (2) a distance equal to the nozzle inside diameter, whichever is larger.

11.3.4 Rectangular Stacks.

11.3.4.1 Determine the number of traverse points as explained in Sections 11.1 and 11.2 of this method. From Table 1-1, determine the grid configuration. Divide the stack cross-section into as many equal rectangular elemental areas as traverse points, and then locate a traverse point at the centroid of each equal area according to the example in Figure 1-4.

11.3.4.2 To use more than the minimum number of traverse points, expand the “minimum number of traverse points” matrix (see Table 1-1) by adding the extra traverse points along one or the other or both legs of the matrix; the final matrix need not be balanced. For example, if a 4 × 3 “minimum number of points” matrix were expanded to 36 points, the final matrix could be 9 × 4 or 12 × 3, and would not necessarily have to be 6 × 6. After constructing the final matrix, divide the stack cross-section into as many equal rectangular, elemental areas as traverse points, and locate a traverse point at the centroid of each equal area.

11.3.4.3 The situation of traverse points being too close to the stack walls is not expected to arise with rectangular stacks. If this problem should ever arise, the Administrator must be contacted for resolution of the matter.

11.4 Verification of Absence of Cyclonic Flow.

11.4.1 In most stationary sources, the direction of stack gas flow is essentially parallel to the stack walls. However, cyclonic flow may exist (1) after such devices as cyclones and inertial demisters following venturi scrubbers, or (2) in stacks having tangential inlets or other duct configurations which tend to induce swirling; in these instances, the presence or absence of cyclonic flow at the sampling location must be determined. The following techniques are acceptable for this determination.

11.4.2 Level and zero the manometer. Connect a Type S pitot tube to the manometer and leak-check system. Position the Type S pitot tube at each traverse point, in succession, so that the planes of the face openings of the pitot tube are perpendicular to the stack cross-sectional plane; when the Type S pitot tube is in this position, it is at “0° reference.” Note the differential pressure (Δp) reading at each traverse point. If a null (zero) pitot reading is obtained at 0° reference at a given traverse point, an acceptable flow condition exists at that point. If the pitot reading is not zero at 0° reference, rotate the pitot tube (up to ±90° yaw angle), until a null reading is obtained. Carefully determine and record the value of the rotation angle (α) to the nearest degree. After the null technique has been applied at each traverse point, calculate the average of the absolute values of α; assign α values of 0° to those points for which no rotation was required, and include these in the overall average. If the average value of α is greater than 20°, the overall flow condition in the stack is unacceptable, and alternative methodology, subject to the approval of the Administrator, must be used to perform accurate sample and velocity traverses.

11.5 The alternative site selection procedure may be used to determine the rotation angles in lieu of the procedure outlined in Section 11.4.

11.5.1 Alternative Measurement Site Selection Procedure. This alternative applies to sources where measurement locations are less than 2 equivalent or duct diameters downstream or less than one-half duct diameter upstream from a flow disturbance. The alternative should be limited to ducts larger than 24 in. in diameter where blockage and wall effects are minimal. A directional flow-sensing probe is used to measure pitch and yaw angles of the gas flow at 40 or more traverse points; the resultant angle is calculated and compared with acceptable criteria for mean and standard deviation.

Note:

Both the pitch and yaw angles are measured from a line passing through the traverse point and parallel to the stack axis. The pitch angle is the angle of the gas flow component in the plane that INCLUDES the traverse line and is parallel to the stack axis. The yaw angle is the angle of the gas flow component in the plane PERPENDICULAR to the traverse line at the traverse point and is measured from the line passing through the traverse point and parallel to the stack axis.

11.5.2 Traverse Points. Use a minimum of 40 traverse points for circular ducts and 42 points for rectangular ducts for the gas flow angle determinations. Follow the procedure outlined in Section 11.3 and Table 1-1 or 1-2 for the location and layout of the traverse points. If the measurement location is determined to be acceptable according to the criteria in this alternative procedure, use the same traverse point number and locations for sampling and velocity measurements.

11.5.3 Measurement Procedure.

11.5.3.1 Prepare the directional probe and differential pressure gauges as recommended by the manufacturer. Capillary tubing or surge tanks may be used to dampen pressure fluctuations. It is recommended, but not required, that a pretest leak check be conducted. To perform a leak check, pressurize or use suction on the impact opening until a reading of at least 7.6 cm (3 in.) H₂ O registers on the differential pressure gauge, then plug the impact opening. The pressure of a leak-free system will remain stable for at least 15 seconds.

11.5.3.2 Level and zero the manometers. Since the manometer level and zero may drift because of vibrations and temperature changes, periodically check the level and zero during the traverse.

11.5.3.3 Position the probe at the appropriate locations in the gas stream, and rotate until zero deflection is indicated for the yaw angle pressure gauge. Determine and record the yaw angle. Record the pressure gauge readings for the pitch angle, and determine the pitch angle from the calibration curve. Repeat this procedure for each traverse point. Complete a “back-purge” of the pressure lines and the impact openings prior to measurements of each traverse point.

11.5.3.4 A post-test check as described in Section 11.5.3.1 is required. If the criteria for a leak-free system are not met, repair the equipment, and repeat the flow angle measurements.

11.5.4 Calibration. Use a flow system as described in Sections 10.1.2.1 and 10.1.2.2 of Method 2. In addition, the flow system shall have the capacity to generate two test-section velocities: one between 365 and 730 m/min (1,200 and 2,400 ft/min) and one between 730 and 1,100 m/min (2,400 and 3,600 ft/min).

11.5.4.1 Cut two entry ports in the test section. The axes through the entry ports shall be perpendicular to each other and intersect in the centroid of the test section. The ports should be elongated slots parallel to the axis of the test section and of sufficient length to allow measurement of pitch angles while maintaining the pitot head position at the test-section centroid. To facilitate alignment of the directional probe during calibration, the test section should be constructed of plexiglass or some other transparent material. All calibration measurements should be made at the same point in the test section, preferably at the centroid of the test section.

11.5.4.2 To ensure that the gas flow is parallel to the central axis of the test section, follow the procedure outlined in Section 11.4 for cyclonic flow determination to measure the gas flow angles at the centroid of the test section from two test ports located 90° apart. The gas flow angle measured in each port must be ±2° of 0°. Straightening vanes should be installed, if necessary, to meet this criterion.

11.5.4.3 Pitch Angle Calibration. Perform a calibration traverse according to the manufacturer's recommended protocol in 5° increments for angles from −60° to +60° at one velocity in each of the two ranges specified above. Average the pressure ratio values obtained for each angle in the two flow ranges, and plot a calibration curve with the average values of the pressure ratio (or other suitable measurement factor as recommended by the manufacturer) versus the pitch angle. Draw a smooth line through the data points. Plot also the data values for each traverse point. Determine the differences between the measured data values and the angle from the calibration curve at the same pressure ratio. The difference at each comparison must be within 2° for angles between 0° and 40° and within 3° for angles between 40° and 60°.

11.5.4.4 Yaw Angle Calibration. Mark the three-dimensional probe to allow the determination of the yaw position of the probe. This is usually a line extending the length of the probe and aligned with the impact opening. To determine the accuracy of measurements of the yaw angle, only the zero or null position need be calibrated as follows: Place the directional probe in the test section, and rotate the probe until the zero position is found. With a protractor or other angle measuring device, measure the angle indicated by the yaw angle indicator on the three-dimensional probe. This should be within 2° of 0°. Repeat this measurement for any other points along the length of the pitot where yaw angle measurements could be read in order to account for variations in the pitot markings used to indicate pitot head positions.

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

12.1 Nomenclature.

L = length.

n = total number of traverse points.

P_i = pitch angle at traverse point i, degree.

R_avg = average resultant angle, degree.

R_i = resultant angle at traverse point i, degree.

S_d = standard deviation, degree.

W = width.

Y_i = yaw angle at traverse point i, degree.

12.2 For a rectangular cross section, an equivalent diameter (D_e) shall be calculated using the following equation, to determine the upstream and downstream distances:

12.3 If use of the alternative site selection procedure (Section 11.5 of this method) is required, perform the following calculations using the equations below: the resultant angle at each traverse point, the average resultant angle, and the standard deviation. Complete the calculations retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round the values after the final calculations.

12.3.1 Calculate the resultant angle at each traverse point:

12.3.2 Calculate the average resultant for the measurements:

12.3.3 Calculate the standard deviations:

12.3.4 Acceptability Criteria. The measurement location is acceptable if R_avg ≤ 20° and S_d ≤ 10°.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

1. Determining Dust Concentration in a Gas Stream, ASME Performance Test Code No. 27. New York. 1957.

2. DeVorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Testing Manual. Air Pollution Control District. Los Angeles, CA. November 1963.

3. Methods for Determining of Velocity, Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Gases. Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manufacturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP-50. 1968.

4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks for Particulate Matter. In: 1971 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 23. ASTM Designation D 2928-71. Philadelphia, PA. 1971.

5. Hanson, H.A., et al. Particulate Sampling Strategies for Large Power Plants Including Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, ORD, ESRL, Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-600/2-76-170. June 1976.

6. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Determination of the Optimum Number of Sampling Points: An Analysis of Method 1 Criteria. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA Contract No. 68-01-3172, Task 7.

7. Hanson, H.A., R.J. Davini, J.K. Morgan, and A.A. Iversen. Particulate Sampling Strategies for Large Power Plants Including Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA-600/2-76-170. June 1976. 350 pp.

8. Brooks, E.F., and R.L. Williams. Flow and Gas Sampling Manual. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA-600/2-76-203. July 1976. 93 pp.

9. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Traverse Point Study. EPA Contract No. 68-02-3172. June 1977. 19 pp.

10. Brown, J. and K. Yu. Test Report: Particulate Sampling Strategy in Circular Ducts. Emission Measurement Branch. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. July 31, 1980. 12 pp.

11. Hawksley, P.G.W., S. Badzioch, and J.H. Blackett. Measurement of Solids in Flue Gases. Leatherhead, England, The British Coal Utilisation Research Association. 1961. pp. 129-133.

12. Knapp, K.T. The Number of Sampling Points Needed for Representative Source Sampling. In: Proceedings of the Fourth National Conference on Energy and Environment. Theodore, L. et al. (ed). Dayton, Dayton Section of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers. October 3-7, 1976. pp. 563-568.

13. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A Proposed Extension of EPA Method 1 Criteria. Pollution Engineering. XV (8):36-37. August 1983.

14. Gerhart, P.M. and M.J. Dorsey. Investigation of Field Test Procedures for Large Fans. University of Akron. Akron, OH. (EPRI Contract CS-1651). Final Report (RP-1649-5). December 1980.

15. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A New Look at Isokinetic Sampling—Theory and Applications. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. VIII (3):19-24. August 1983.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Image Not Available

Method 1A—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources With Small Stacks or Ducts

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test method: Method 1.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of the method is to provide guidance for the selection of sampling ports and traverse points at which sampling for air pollutants will be performed pursuant to regulations set forth in this part.

1.2 Applicability. The applicability and principle of this method are identical to Method 1, except its applicability is limited to stacks or ducts. This method is applicable to flowing gas streams in ducts, stacks, and flues of less than about 0.30 meter (12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m ² (113 in.²) in cross-sectional area, but equal to or greater than about 0.10 meter (4 in.) in diameter, or 0.0081 m ² (12.57 in.²) in cross-sectional area. This method cannot be used when the flow is cyclonic or swirling.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 The method is designed to aid in the representative measurement of pollutant emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate from a stationary source. A measurement site or a pair of measurement sites where the effluent stream is flowing in a known direction is (are) selected. The cross-section of the stack is divided into a number of equal areas. Traverse points are then located within each of these equal areas.

2.2 In these small diameter stacks or ducts, the conventional Method 5 stack assembly (consisting of a Type S pitot tube attached to a sampling probe, equipped with a nozzle and thermocouple) blocks a significant portion of the cross-section of the duct and causes inaccurate measurements. Therefore, for particulate matter (PM) sampling in small stacks or ducts, the gas velocity is measured using a standard pitot tube downstream of the actual emission sampling site. The straight run of duct between the PM sampling and velocity measurement sites allows the flow profile, temporarily disturbed by the presence of the sampling probe, to redevelop and stabilize.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies [Reserved]

7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]

9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]

10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]

11.0 Procedure

11.1 Selection of Measurement Site.

11.1.1 Particulate Measurements—Steady or Unsteady Flow. Select a particulate measurement site located preferably at least eight equivalent stack or duct diameters downstream and 10 equivalent diameters upstream from any flow disturbances such as bends, expansions, or contractions in the stack, or from a visible flame. Next, locate the velocity measurement site eight equivalent diameters downstream of the particulate measurement site (see Figure 1A-1). If such locations are not available, select an alternative particulate measurement location at least two equivalent stack or duct diameters downstream and two and one-half diameters upstream from any flow disturbance. Then, locate the velocity measurement site two equivalent diameters downstream from the particulate measurement site. (See Section 12.2 of Method 1 for calculating equivalent diameters for a rectangular cross-section.)

11.1.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or Velocity (Steady or Unsteady Flow) Measurements. For PM sampling when the volumetric flow rate in a duct is constant with respect to time, Section 11.1.1 of Method 1 may be followed, with the PM sampling and velocity measurement performed at one location. To demonstrate that the flow rate is constant (within 10 percent) when PM measurements are made, perform complete velocity traverses before and after the PM sampling run, and calculate the deviation of the flow rate derived after the PM sampling run from the one derived before the PM sampling run. The PM sampling run is acceptable if the deviation does not exceed 10 percent.

11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse Points.

11.2.1 Particulate Measurements (Steady or Unsteady Flow). Use Figure 1-1 of Method 1 to determine the number of traverse points to use at both the velocity measurement and PM sampling locations. Before referring to the figure, however, determine the distances between both the velocity measurement and PM sampling sites to the nearest upstream and downstream disturbances. Then divide each distance by the stack diameter or equivalent diameter to express the distances in terms of the number of duct diameters. Then, determine the number of traverse points from Figure 1-1 of Method 1 corresponding to each of these four distances. Choose the highest of the four numbers of traverse points (or a greater number) so that, for circular ducts the number is a multiple of four; and for rectangular ducts, the number is one of those shown in Table 1-1 of Method 1. When the optimum duct diameter location criteria can be satisfied, the minimum number of traverse points required is eight for circular ducts and nine for rectangular ducts.

11.2.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or only Velocity (Non-Particulate) Measurements. Use Figure 1-2 of Method 1 to determine number of traverse points, following the same procedure used for PM sampling as described in Section 11.2.1 of Method 1. When the optimum duct diameter location criteria can be satisfied, the minimum number of traverse points required is eight for circular ducts and nine for rectangular ducts.

11.3 Cross-sectional Layout, Location of Traverse Points, and Verification of the Absence of Cyclonic Flow. Same as Method 1, Sections 11.3 and 11.4, respectively.

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations [Reserved]

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

Same as Method 1, Section 16.0, References 1 through 6, with the addition of the following:

1. Vollaro, Robert F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller Than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina. January 1977.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Image Not Available

Method 2—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate (Type S Pitot Tube)

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test method: Method 1.

1.0 Scope and Application.

1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of the average velocity and the volumetric flow rate of a gas stream.

1.2 This method is not applicable at measurement sites that fail to meet the criteria of Method 1, Section 11.1. Also, the method cannot be used for direct measurement in cyclonic or swirling gas streams; Section 11.4 of Method 1 shows how to determine cyclonic or swirling flow conditions. When unacceptable conditions exist, alternative procedures, subject to the approval of the Administrator, must be employed to produce accurate flow rate determinations. Examples of such alternative procedures are: (1) to install straightening vanes; (2) to calculate the total volumetric flow rate stoichiometrically, or (3) to move to another measurement site at which the flow is acceptable.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method.

2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack is determined from the gas density and from measurement of the average velocity head with a Type S (Stausscheibe or reverse type) pitot tube.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be considered acceptable.

6.1 Type S Pitot Tube.

6.1.1 Pitot tube made of metal tubing (e.g., stainless steel) as shown in Figure 2-1. It is recommended that the external tubing diameter (dimension D_t, Figure 2-2b) be between 0.48 and 0.95 cm (3/16 and 3/8 inch). There shall be an equal distance from the base of each leg of the pitot tube to its face-opening plane (dimensions P_A and P_B, Figure 2-2b); it is recommended that this distance be between 1.05 and 1.50 times the external tubing diameter. The face openings of the pitot tube shall, preferably, be aligned as shown in Figure 2-2; however, slight misalignments of the openings are permissible (see Figure 2-3).

6.1.2 The Type S pitot tube shall have a known coefficient, determined as outlined in Section 10.0. An identification number shall be assigned to the pitot tube; this number shall be permanently marked or engraved on the body of the tube. A standard pitot tube may be used instead of a Type S, provided that it meets the specifications of Sections 6.7 and 10.2. Note, however, that the static and impact pressure holes of standard pitot tubes are susceptible to plugging in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, whenever a standard pitot tube is used to perform a traverse, adequate proof must be furnished that the openings of the pitot tube have not plugged up during the traverse period. This can be accomplished by comparing the velocity head (Δp) measurement recorded at a selected traverse point (readable Δp value) with a second Δp measurement recorded after “back purging” with pressurized air to clean the impact and static holes of the standard pitot tube. If the before and after Δp measurements are within 5 percent, then the traverse data are acceptable. Otherwise, the data should be rejected and the traverse measurements redone. Note that the selected traverse point should be one that demonstrates a readable Δp value. If “back purging” at regular intervals is part of a routine procedure, then comparative Δp measurements shall be conducted as above for the last two traverse points that exhibit suitable Δp measurements.

6.2 Differential Pressure Gauge. An inclined manometer or equivalent device. Most sampling trains are equipped with a 10 in. (water column) inclined-vertical manometer, having 0.01 in. H₂ 0 divisions on the 0 to 1 in. inclined scale, and 0.1 in. H₂ 0 divisions on the 1 to 10 in. vertical scale. This type of manometer (or other gauge of equivalent sensitivity) is satisfactory for the measurement of Δp values as low as 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H₂ 0. However, a differential pressure gauge of greater sensitivity shall be used (subject to the approval of the Administrator), if any of the following is found to be true: (1) the arithmetic average of all Δp readings at the traverse points in the stack is less than 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H₂ 0; (2) for traverses of 12 or more points, more than 10 percent of the individual Δp readings are below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H₂ 0; or (3) for traverses of fewer than 12 points, more than one Δp reading is below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H₂ 0. Reference 18 (see Section 17.0) describes commercially available instrumentation for the measurement of low-range gas velocities.

6.2.1 As an alternative to criteria (1) through (3) above, Equation 2-1 (Section 12.2) may be used to determine the necessity of using a more sensitive differential pressure gauge. If T is greater than 1.05, the velocity head data are unacceptable and a more sensitive differential pressure gauge must be used.

Note:

If differential pressure gauges other than inclined manometers are used (e.g., magnehelic gauges), their calibration must be checked after each test series. To check the calibration of a differential pressure gauge, compare Δp readings of the gauge with those of a gauge-oil manometer at a minimum of three points, approximately representing the range of Δp values in the stack. If, at each point, the values of Δp as read by the differential pressure gauge and gauge-oil manometer agree to within 5 percent, the differential pressure gauge shall be considered to be in proper calibration. Otherwise, the test series shall either be voided, or procedures to adjust the measured Δp values and final results shall be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

6.3 Temperature Sensor. A thermocouple, liquid-filled bulb thermometer, bimetallic thermometer, mercury-in-glass thermometer, or other gauge capable of measuring temperatures to within 1.5 percent of the minimum absolute stack temperature. The temperature sensor shall be attached to the pitot tube such that the sensor tip does not touch any metal; the gauge shall be in an interference-free arrangement with respect to the pitot tube face openings (see Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-4). Alternative positions may be used if the pitot tube-temperature gauge system is calibrated according to the procedure of Section 10.0. Provided that a difference of not more than 1 percent in the average velocity measurement is introduced, the temperature gauge need not be attached to the pitot tube. This alternative is subject to the approval of the Administrator.

6.4 Pressure Probe and Gauge. A piezometer tube and mercury- or water-filled U-tube manometer capable of measuring stack pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg. The static tap of a standard type pitot tube or one leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face opening planes positioned parallel to the gas flow may also be used as the pressure probe.

6.5 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.54 mm (0.1 in.) Hg.

Note:

The barometric pressure reading may be obtained from a nearby National Weather Service station. In this case, the station value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested and an adjustment for elevation differences between the weather station and sampling point shall be made at a rate of minus 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or plus 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg per 30 m (100 ft.) for elevation decrease.

6.6 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Method 3 equipment, if needed (see Section 8.6), to determine the stack gas dry molecular weight, and Method 4 (reference method) or Method 5 equipment for moisture content determination. Other methods may be used subject to approval of the Administrator.

6.7 Calibration Pitot Tube. When calibration of the Type S pitot tube is necessary (see Section 10.1), a standard pitot tube shall be used for a reference. The standard pitot tube shall, preferably, have a known coefficient, obtained either (1) directly from the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Gaithersburg MD 20899, (301) 975-2002, or (2) by calibration against another standard pitot tube with an NIST-traceable coefficient. Alternatively, a standard pitot tube designed according to the criteria given in Sections 6.7.1 through 6.7.5 below and illustrated in Figure 2-5 (see also References 7, 8, and 17 in Section 17.0) may be used. Pitot tubes designed according to these specifications will have baseline coefficients of 0.99 ± 0.01.

6.7.1 Standard Pitot Design.

6.7.1.1 Hemispherical (shown in Figure 2-5), ellipsoidal, or conical tip.

6.7.1.2 A minimum of six diameters straight run (based upon D, the external diameter of the tube) between the tip and the static pressure holes.

6.7.1.3 A minimum of eight diameters straight run between the static pressure holes and the centerline of the external tube, following the 90° bend.

6.7.1.4 Static pressure holes of equal size (approximately 0.1 D), equally spaced in a piezometer ring configuration.

6.7.1.5 90° bend, with curved or mitered junction.

6.8 Differential Pressure Gauge for Type S Pitot Tube Calibration. An inclined manometer or equivalent. If the single-velocity calibration technique is employed (see Section 10.1.2.3), the calibration differential pressure gauge shall be readable to the nearest 0.127 mm (0.005 in.) H₂ 0. For multivelocity calibrations, the gauge shall be readable to the nearest 0.127 mm (0.005 in.) H₂ 0 for Δp values between 1.27 and 25.4 mm (0.05 and 1.00 in.) H₂ 0, and to the nearest 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H₂ 0 for Δp values above 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) H₂ 0. A special, more sensitive gauge will be required to read Δp values below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H₂ 0 (see Reference 18 in Section 16.0).

7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]

8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis

8.1 Set up the apparatus as shown in Figure 2-1. Capillary tubing or surge tanks installed between the manometer and pitot tube may be used to dampen Δp fluctuations. It is recommended, but not required, that a pretest leak-check be conducted as follows: (1) blow through the pitot impact opening until at least 7.6 cm (3.0 in.) H₂ 0 velocity head registers on the manometer; then, close off the impact opening. The pressure shall remain stable for at least 15 seconds; (2) do the same for the static pressure side, except using suction to obtain the minimum of 7.6 cm (3.0 in.) H₂ 0. Other leak-check procedures, subject to the approval of the Administrator, may be used.

8.2 Level and zero the manometer. Because the manometer level and zero may drift due to vibrations and temperature changes, make periodic checks during the traverse (at least once per hour). Record all necessary data on a form similar to that shown in Figure 2-6.

8.3 Measure the velocity head and temperature at the traverse points specified by Method 1. Ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is being used for the range of Δp values encountered (see Section 6.2). If it is necessary to change to a more sensitive gauge, do so, and remeasure the Δp and temperature readings at each traverse point. Conduct a post-test leak-check (mandatory), as described in Section 8.1 above, to validate the traverse run.

8.4 Measure the static pressure in the stack. One reading is usually adequate.

8.5 Determine the atmospheric pressure.

8.6 Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight. For combustion processes or processes that emit essentially CO₂, O₂, CO, and N₂, use Method 3. For processes emitting essentially air, an analysis need not be conducted; use a dry molecular weight of 29.0. For other processes, other methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, must be used.

8.7 Obtain the moisture content from Method 4 (reference method, or equivalent) or from Method 5.

8.8 Determine the cross-sectional area of the stack or duct at the sampling location. Whenever possible, physically measure the stack dimensions rather than using blueprints. Do not assume that stack diameters are equal. Measure each diameter distance to verify its dimensions.

9.0 Quality Control

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

10.1 Type S Pitot Tube. Before its initial use, carefully examine the Type S pitot tube top, side, and end views to verify that the face openings of the tube are aligned within the specifications illustrated in Figures 2-2 and 2-3. The pitot tube shall not be used if it fails to meet these alignment specifications. After verifying the face opening alignment, measure and record the following dimensions of the pitot tube: (a) the external tubing diameter (dimension D_t, Figure 2-2b); and (b) the base-to-opening plane distances (dimensions P_A and P_B, Figure 2-2b). If D_t is between 0.48 and 0.95 cm 3/16 and 3/8 in.), and if P_A and P_B are equal and between 1.05 and 1.50 D_t, there are two possible options: (1) the pitot tube may be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5, or (2) a baseline (isolated tube) coefficient value of 0.84 may be assigned to the pitot tube. Note, however, that if the pitot tube is part of an assembly, calibration may still be required, despite knowledge of the baseline coefficient value (see Section 10.1.1). If D_t, P_A, and P_B are outside the specified limits, the pitot tube must be calibrated as outlined in Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5.

10.1.1 Type S Pitot Tube Assemblies. During sample and velocity traverses, the isolated Type S pitot tube is not always used; in many instances, the pitot tube is used in combination with other source-sampling components (e.g., thermocouple, sampling probe, nozzle) as part of an “assembly.” The presence of other sampling components can sometimes affect the baseline value of the Type S pitot tube coefficient (Reference 9 in Section 17.0); therefore, an assigned (or otherwise known) baseline coefficient value may or may not be valid for a given assembly. The baseline and assembly coefficient values will be identical only when the relative placement of the components in the assembly is such that aerodynamic interference effects are eliminated. Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8 illustrate interference-free component arrangements for Type S pitot tubes having external tubing diameters between 0.48 and 0.95 cm (3/16 and 3/8 in.). Type S pitot tube assemblies that fail to meet any or all of the specifications of Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8 shall be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in Sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5, and prior to calibration, the values of the intercomponent spacings (pitot-nozzle, pitot-thermocouple, pitot-probe sheath) shall be measured and recorded.

Note:

Do not use a Type S pitot tube assembly that is constructed such that the impact pressure opening plane of the pitot tube is below the entry plane of the nozzle (see Figure 2-6B).

10.1.2 Calibration Setup. If the Type S pitot tube is to be calibrated, one leg of the tube shall be permanently marked A, and the other, B. Calibration shall be performed in a flow system having the following essential design features:

10.1.2.1 The flowing gas stream must be confined to a duct of definite cross-sectional area, either circular or rectangular. For circular cross sections, the minimum duct diameter shall be 30.48 cm (12 in.); for rectangular cross sections, the width (shorter side) shall be at least 25.4 cm (10 in.).

10.1.2.2 The cross-sectional area of the calibration duct must be constant over a distance of 10 or more duct diameters. For a rectangular cross section, use an equivalent diameter, calculated according to Equation 2-2 (see Section 12.3), to determine the number of duct diameters. To ensure the presence of stable, fully developed flow patterns at the calibration site, or “test section,” the site must be located at least eight diameters downstream and two diameters upstream from the nearest disturbances.

Note:

The eight- and two-diameter criteria are not absolute; other test section locations may be used (subject to approval of the Administrator), provided that the flow at the test site has been demonstrated to be or found stable and parallel to the duct axis.

10.1.2.3 The flow system shall have the capacity to generate a test-section velocity around 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min). This velocity must be constant with time to guarantee steady flow during calibration. Note that Type S pitot tube coefficients obtained by single-velocity calibration at 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min) will generally be valid to ±3 percent for the measurement of velocities above 300 m/min (1,000 ft/min) and to ±6 percent for the measurement of velocities between 180 and 300 m/min (600 and 1,000 ft/min). If a more precise correlation between the pitot tube coefficient, (C_p), and velocity is desired, the flow system should have the capacity to generate at least four distinct, time-invariant test-section velocities covering the velocity range from 180 to 1,500 m/min (600 to 5,000 ft/min), and calibration data shall be taken at regular velocity intervals over this range (see References 9 and 14 in Section 17.0 for details).

10.1.2.4 Two entry ports, one for each of the standard and Type S pitot tubes, shall be cut in the test section. The standard pitot entry port shall be located slightly downstream of the Type S port, so that the standard and Type S impact openings will lie in the same cross-sectional plane during calibration. To facilitate alignment of the pitot tubes during calibration, it is advisable that the test section be constructed of Plexiglas^TM or some other transparent material.

10.1.3 Calibration Procedure. Note that this procedure is a general one and must not be used without first referring to the special considerations presented in Section 10.1.5. Note also that this procedure applies only to single-velocity calibration. To obtain calibration data for the A and B sides of the Type S pitot tube, proceed as follows:

10.1.3.1 Make sure that the manometer is properly filled and that the oil is free from contamination and is of the proper density. Inspect and leak-check all pitot lines; repair or replace if necessary.

10.1.3.2 Level and zero the manometer. Switch on the fan, and allow the flow to stabilize. Seal the Type S pitot tube entry port.

10.1.3.3 Ensure that the manometer is level and zeroed. Position the standard pitot tube at the calibration point (determined as outlined in Section 10.1.5.1), and align the tube so that its tip is pointed directly into the flow. Particular care should be taken in aligning the tube to avoid yaw and pitch angles. Make sure that the entry port surrounding the tube is properly sealed.

10.1.3.4 Read Δp_std, and record its value in a data table similar to the one shown in Figure 2-9. Remove the standard pitot tube from the duct, and disconnect it from the manometer. Seal the standard entry port.

10.1.3.5 Connect the Type S pitot tube to the manometer and leak-check. Open the Type S tube entry port. Check the manometer level and zero. Insert and align the Type S pitot tube so that its A side impact opening is at the same point as was the standard pitot tube and is pointed directly into the flow. Make sure that the entry port surrounding the tube is properly sealed.

10.1.3.6 Read Δp_s, and enter its value in the data table. Remove the Type S pitot tube from the duct, and disconnect it from the manometer.

10.1.3.7 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through 10.1.3.6 until three pairs of Δp readings have been obtained for the A side of the Type S pitot tube.

10.1.3.8 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through 10.1.3.7 for the B side of the Type S pitot tube.

10.1.3.9 Perform calculations as described in Section 12.4. Use the Type S pitot tube only if the values of σ_A and σ_B are less than or equal to 0.01 and if the absolute value of the difference between C_p(A) and C_p(B) is 0.01 or less.

10.1.4 Special Considerations.

10.1.4.1 Selection of Calibration Point.

10.1.4.1.1 When an isolated Type S pitot tube is calibrated, select a calibration point at or near the center of the duct, and follow the procedures outlined in Section 10.1.3. The Type S pitot coefficients measured or calculated, (i.e. C_p(A) and C_p(B)) will be valid, so long as either: (1) the isolated pitot tube is used; or (2) the pitot tube is used with other components (nozzle, thermocouple, sample probe) in an arrangement that is free from aerodynamic interference effects (see Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8).

10.1.4.1.2 For Type S pitot tube-thermocouple combinations (without probe assembly), select a calibration point at or near the center of the duct, and follow the procedures outlined in Section 10.1.3. The coefficients so obtained will be valid so long as the pitot tube-thermocouple combination is used by itself or with other components in an interference-free arrangement (Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8).

10.1.4.1.3 For Type S pitot tube combinations with complete probe assemblies, the calibration point should be located at or near the center of the duct; however, insertion of a probe sheath into a small duct may cause significant cross-sectional area interference and blockage and yield incorrect coefficient values (Reference 9 in Section 17.0). Therefore, to minimize the blockage effect, the calibration point may be a few inches off-center if necessary. The actual blockage effect will be negligible when the theoretical blockage, as determined by a projected-area model of the probe sheath, is 2 percent or less of the duct cross-sectional area for assemblies without external sheaths (Figure 2-10a), and 3 percent or less for assemblies with external sheaths (Figure 2-10b).

10.1.4.2 For those probe assemblies in which pitot tube-nozzle interference is a factor (i.e., those in which the pitot-nozzle separation distance fails to meet the specifications illustrated in Figure 2-7A), the value of C_p(s) depends upon the amount of free space between the tube and nozzle and, therefore, is a function of nozzle size. In these instances, separate calibrations shall be performed with each of the commonly used nozzle sizes in place. Note that the single-velocity calibration technique is acceptable for this purpose, even though the larger nozzle sizes (>0.635 cm or 1/4 in.) are not ordinarily used for isokinetic sampling at velocities around 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min), which is the calibration velocity. Note also that it is not necessary to draw an isokinetic sample during calibration (see Reference 19 in Section 17.0).

10.1.4.3 For a probe assembly constructed such that its pitot tube is always used in the same orientation, only one side of the pitot tube need be calibrated (the side which will face the flow). The pitot tube must still meet the alignment specifications of Figure 2-2 or 2-3, however, and must have an average deviation (σ) value of 0.01 or less (see Section 10.1.4.4).

10.1.5 Field Use and Recalibration.

10.1.5.1 Field Use.

10.1.5.1.1 When a Type S pitot tube (isolated or in an assembly) is used in the field, the appropriate coefficient value (whether assigned or obtained by calibration) shall be used to perform velocity calculations. For calibrated Type S pitot tubes, the A side coefficient shall be used when the A side of the tube faces the flow, and the B side coefficient shall be used when the B side faces the flow. Alternatively, the arithmetic average of the A and B side coefficient values may be used, irrespective of which side faces the flow.

10.1.5.1.2 When a probe assembly is used to sample a small duct, 30.5 to 91.4 cm (12 to 36 in.) in diameter, the probe sheath sometimes blocks a significant part of the duct cross-section, causing a reduction in the effective value of C_p(s). Consult Reference 9 (see Section 17.0) for details. Conventional pitot-sampling probe assemblies are not recommended for use in ducts having inside diameters smaller than 30.5 cm (12 in.) (see Reference 16 in Section 17.0).

10.1.5.2 Recalibration.

10.1.5.2.1 Isolated Pitot Tubes. After each field use, the pitot tube shall be carefully reexamined in top, side, and end views. If the pitot face openings are still aligned within the specifications illustrated in Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, it can be assumed that the baseline coefficient of the pitot tube has not changed. If, however, the tube has been damaged to the extent that it no longer meets the specifications of Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, the damage shall either be repaired to restore proper alignment of the face openings, or the tube shall be discarded.

10.1.5.2.2 Pitot Tube Assemblies. After each field use, check the face opening alignment of the pitot tube, as in Section 10.1.5.2.1. Also, remeasure the intercomponent spacings of the assembly. If the intercomponent spacings have not changed and the face opening alignment is acceptable, it can be assumed that the coefficient of the assembly has not changed. If the face opening alignment is no longer within the specifications of Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, either repair the damage or replace the pitot tube (calibrating the new assembly, if necessary). If the intercomponent spacings have changed, restore the original spacings, or recalibrate the assembly.

10.2 Standard Pitot Tube (if applicable). If a standard pitot tube is used for the velocity traverse, the tube shall be constructed according to the criteria of Section 6.7 and shall be assigned a baseline coefficient value of 0.99. If the standard pitot tube is used as part of an assembly, the tube shall be in an interference-free arrangement (subject to the approval of the Administrator).

10.3 Temperature Sensors.

10.3.1 After each field use, calibrate dial thermometers, liquid-filled bulb thermometers, thermocouple-potentiometer systems, and other sensors at a temperature within 10 percent of the average absolute stack temperature. For temperatures up to 405 °C (761 °F), use an ASTM mercury-in-glass reference thermometer, or equivalent, as a reference. Alternatively, either a reference thermocouple and potentiometer (calibrated against NIST standards) or thermometric fixed points (e.g., ice bath and boiling water, corrected for barometric pressure) may be used. For temperatures above 405°C (761 °F), use a reference thermocouple-potentiometer system calibrated against NIST standards or an alternative reference, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

10.3.2 The temperature data recorded in the field shall be considered valid. If, during calibration, the absolute temperature measured with the sensor being calibrated and the reference sensor agree within 1.5 percent, the temperature data taken in the field shall be considered valid. Otherwise, the pollutant emission test shall either be considered invalid or adjustments (if appropriate) of the test results shall be made, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer used against a mercury barometer.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see Section 8.0).

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.

12.1 Nomenclature.

A = Cross-sectional area of stack, m² (ft²).

B_ws = Water vapor in the gas stream (from Method 4 (reference method) or Method 5), proportion by volume.

C_p = Pitot tube coefficient, dimensionless.

C_p(s) = Type S pitot tube coefficient, dimensionless.

C_p(std) = Standard pitot tube coefficient; use 0.99 if the coefficient is unknown and the tube is designed according to the criteria of Sections 6.7.1 to 6.7.5 of this method.

D_e = Equivalent diameter.

K = 0.127 mm H₂ O (metric units). 0.005 in. H₂ O (English units).

K_p = Velocity equation constant.

L = Length.

M_d = Molecular weight of stack gas, dry basis (see Section 8.6), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).

M_s = Molecular weight of stack gas, wet basis, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).

n = Total number of traverse points.

P_bar = Barometric pressure at measurement site, mm Hg (in. Hg).

P_g = Stack static pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).

P_s = Absolute stack pressure (P_bar + P_g), mm Hg (in. Hg),

P_std = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).

Q_sd = Dry volumetric stack gas flow rate corrected to standard conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).

T = Sensitivity factor for differential pressure gauges.

T_s = Stack temperature, °C (°F).

T_s(abs) = Absolute stack temperature, °K (°R).

= 273 + T_s for metric units,

= 460 + T_s for English units.

T_std = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).

V_s = Average stack gas velocity, m/sec (ft/sec).

W = Width.

Δp = Velocity head of stack gas, mm H₂ O (in. H₂₀).

Δp_i = Individual velocity head reading at traverse point “i”, mm (in.) H₂ O.

Δp_std = Velocity head measured by the standard pitot tube, cm (in.) H₂ O.

Δp_s = Velocity head measured by the Type S pitot tube, cm (in.) H₂ O.

3600 = Conversion Factor, sec/hr.

18.0 = Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).

12.2 Calculate T as follows:

12.3 Calculate D_e as follows:

12.4 Calibration of Type S Pitot Tube.

12.4.1 For each of the six pairs of Δp readings (i.e., three from side A and three from side B) obtained in Section 10.1.3, calculate the value of the Type S pitot tube coefficient according to Equation 2-3:

12.4.2 Calculate C_p(A), the mean A-side coefficient, and C_p(B), the mean B-side coefficient. Calculate the difference between these two average values.

12.4.3 Calculate the deviation of each of the three A-side values of C_p(s) from C_p(A), and the deviation of each of the three B-side values of C_p(s) from C_p(B), using Equation 2-4:

12.4.4 Calculate σ the average deviation from the mean, for both the A and B sides of the pitot tube. Use Equation 2-5:

12.5 Molecular Weight of Stack Gas.

12.6 Average Stack Gas Velocity.

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

12.7 Average Stack Gas Dry Volumetric Flow Rate.

Image Not Available

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

1. Mark, L.S. Mechanical Engineers' Handbook. New York. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. 1951.

2. Perry, J.H., ed. Chemical Engineers' Handbook. New York. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. 1960.

3. Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S. Smith. Significance of Errors in Stack Sampling Measurements. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. (Presented at the Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, MO., June 14-19, 1970).

4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks for Particulate Matter. In: 1971 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 23. Philadelphia, PA. 1971. ASTM Designation D 2928-71.

5. Vennard, J.K. Elementary Fluid Mechanics. New York. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1947.

6. Fluid Meters—Their Theory and Application. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York, N.Y. 1959.

7. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. 1972. p. 208.

8. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 26. 1974. p. 648.

9. Vollaro, R.F. Guidelines for Type S Pitot Tube Calibration. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. (Presented at 1st Annual Meeting, Source Evaluation Society, Dayton, OH, September 18, 1975.)

10. Vollaro, R.F. A Type S Pitot Tube Calibration Study. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, N.C. July 1974.

11. Vollaro, R.F. The Effects of Impact Opening Misalignment on the Value of the Type S Pitot Tube Coefficient. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. October 1976.

12. Vollaro, R.F. Establishment of a Baseline Coefficient Value for Properly Constructed Type S Pitot Tubes. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.

13. Vollaro, R.F. An Evaluation of Single-Velocity Calibration Technique as a Means of Determining Type S Pitot Tube Coefficients. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. August 1975.

14. Vollaro, R.F. The Use of Type S Pitot Tubes for the Measurement of Low Velocities. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.

15. Smith, Marvin L. Velocity Calibration of EPA Type Source Sampling Probe. United Technologies Corporation, Pratt and Whitney Aircraft Division, East Hartford, CT. 1975.

16. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.

17. Ower, E. and R.C. Pankhurst. The Measurement of Air Flow, 4th Ed. London, Pergamon Press. 1966.

18. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially Available Instrumentation for the Measurement of Low-Range Gas Velocities. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976. (Unpublished Paper).

19. Gnyp, A.W., et al. An Experimental Investigation of the Effect of Pitot Tube-Sampling Probe Configurations on the Magnitude of the S Type Pitot Tube Coefficient for Commercially Available Source Sampling Probes. Prepared by the University of Windsor for the Ministry of the Environment, Toronto, Canada. February 1975.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

PLANT

DATE

RUN NO.

STACK DIA. OR DIMENSIONS, m (in.)

BAROMETRIC PRESS., mm Hg (in. Hg)

CROSS SECTIONAL AREA, m² (ft²)

OPERATORS

PITOT TUBE I.D. NO.

AVG. COEFFICIENT, Cp =

LAST DATE CALIBRATED

SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION

Figure 2-6. Velocity Traverse Data

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

PITOT TUBE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:

DATE:

CALIBRATED BY:

Image Not Available

[Cp, avg (side A)—Cp, avg (side B)]*

*Must be less than or equal to 0.01

Figure 2-9. Pitot Tube Calibration Data

Image Not Available

Method 2A—Direct Measurement of Gas Volume Through Pipes and Small Ducts

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of gas flow rates in pipes and small ducts, either in-line or at exhaust positions, within the temperature range of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F).

1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 A gas volume meter is used to measure gas volume directly. Temperature and pressure measurements are made to allow correction of the volume to standard conditions.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be considered acceptable.

6.1 Gas Volume Meter. A positive displacement meter, turbine meter, or other direct measuring device capable of measuring volume to within 2 percent. The meter shall be equipped with a temperature sensor (accurate to within ±2 percent of the minimum absolute temperature) and a pressure gauge (accurate to within ±2.5 mm Hg). The manufacturer's recommended capacity of the meter shall be sufficient for the expected maximum and minimum flow rates for the sampling conditions. Temperature, pressure, corrosive characteristics, and pipe size are factors necessary to consider in selecting a suitable gas meter.

6.2 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within ±2.5 mm Hg.

Note:

In many cases, the barometric reading may be obtained from a nearby National Weather Service station, in which case the station value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested and an adjustment for elevation differences between the weather station and sampling point shall be applied at a rate of minus 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or vice versa for elevation decrease.

6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement to within 1 second.

7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]

8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis

8.1 Installation. As there are numerous types of pipes and small ducts that may be subject to volume measurement, it would be difficult to describe all possible installation schemes. In general, flange fittings should be used for all connections wherever possible. Gaskets or other seal materials should be used to assure leak-tight connections. The volume meter should be located so as to avoid severe vibrations and other factors that may affect the meter calibration.

8.2 Leak Test.

8.2.1 A volume meter installed at a location under positive pressure may be leak-checked at the meter connections by using a liquid leak detector solution containing a surfactant. Apply a small amount of the solution to the connections. If a leak exists, bubbles will form, and the leak must be corrected.

8.2.2 A volume meter installed at a location under negative pressure is very difficult to test for leaks without blocking flow at the inlet of the line and watching for meter movement. If this procedure is not possible, visually check all connections to assure leak-tight seals.

8.3 Volume Measurement.

8.3.1 For sources with continuous, steady emission flow rates, record the initial meter volume reading, meter temperature(s), meter pressure, and start the stopwatch. Throughout the test period, record the meter temperatures and pressures so that average values can be determined. At the end of the test, stop the timer, and record the elapsed time, the final volume reading, meter temperature, and pressure. Record the barometric pressure at the beginning and end of the test run. Record the data on a table similar to that shown in Figure 2A-1.

8.3.2 For sources with noncontinuous, non-steady emission flow rates, use the procedure in Section 8.3.1 with the addition of the following: Record all the meter parameters and the start and stop times corresponding to each process cyclical or noncontinuous event.

9.0 Quality Control

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

10.1 Volume Meter.

10.1.1 The volume meter is calibrated against a standard reference meter prior to its initial use in the field. The reference meter is a spirometer or liquid displacement meter with a capacity consistent with that of the test meter.

10.1.2 Alternatively, a calibrated, standard pitot may be used as the reference meter in conjunction with a wind tunnel assembly. Attach the test meter to the wind tunnel so that the total flow passes through the test meter. For each calibration run, conduct a 4-point traverse along one stack diameter at a position at least eight diameters of straight tunnel downstream and two diameters upstream of any bend, inlet, or air mover. Determine the traverse point locations as specified in Method 1. Calculate the reference volume using the velocity values following the procedure in Method 2, the wind tunnel cross-sectional area, and the run time.

10.1.3 Set up the test meter in a configuration similar to that used in the field installation (i.e., in relation to the flow moving device). Connect the temperature sensor and pressure gauge as they are to be used in the field. Connect the reference meter at the inlet of the flow line, if appropriate for the meter, and begin gas flow through the system to condition the meters. During this conditioning operation, check the system for leaks.

10.1.4 The calibration shall be performed during at least three different flow rates. The calibration flow rates shall be about 0.3, 0.6, and 0.9 times the rated maximum flow rate of the test meter.

10.1.5 For each calibration run, the data to be collected include: reference meter initial and final volume readings, the test meter initial and final volume reading, meter average temperature and pressure, barometric pressure, and run time. Repeat the runs at each flow rate at least three times.

10.1.6 Calculate the test meter calibration coefficient as indicated in Section 12.2.

10.1.7 Compare the three Y_m values at each of the flow rates tested and determine the maximum and minimum values. The difference between the maximum and minimum values at each flow rate should be no greater than 0.030. Extra runs may be required to complete this requirement. If this specification cannot be met in six successive runs, the test meter is not suitable for use. In addition, the meter coefficients should be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications are met at all the flow rates, average all the Y_m values from runs meeting the specifications to obtain an average meter calibration coefficient, Y_m.

10.1.8 The procedure above shall be performed at least once for each volume meter. Thereafter, an abbreviated calibration check shall be completed following each field test. The calibration of the volume meter shall be checked with the meter pressure set at the average value encountered during the field test. Three calibration checks (runs) shall be performed using this average flow rate value. Calculate the average value of the calibration factor. If the calibration has changed by more than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter over the full range of flow as described above.

Note:

If the volume meter calibration coefficient values obtained before and after a test series differ by more than 5 percent, the test series shall either be voided, or calculations for the test series shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient value (i.e., before or after) gives the greater value of pollutant emission rate.

10.2 Temperature Sensor. After each test series, check the temperature sensor at ambient temperature. Use an American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) mercury-in-glass reference thermometer, or equivalent, as a reference. If the sensor being checked agrees within 2 percent (absolute temperature) of the reference, the temperature data collected in the field shall be considered valid. Otherwise, the test data shall be considered invalid or adjustments of the results shall be made, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

10.3 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer used against a mercury barometer prior to the field test.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see Section 8.0).

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.

12.1 Nomenclature.

f = Final reading.

i = Initial reading.

P_bar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.

P_g = Average static pressure in volume meter, mm Hg.

Q_s = Gas flow rate, m³/min, standard conditions.

s = Standard conditions, 20°C and 760 mm Hg.

T_r = Reference meter average temperature, °K (°R).

T_m = Test meter average temperature, °K (°R).

V_r = Reference meter volume reading, m³.

V_m = Test meter volume reading, m³.

Y_m = Test meter calibration coefficient, dimensionless.

θ = Elapsed test period time, min.

12.2 Test Meter Calibration Coefficient.

Image Not Available

12.3 Volume.

12.4 Gas Flow Rate.

13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]

16.0 References

1. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. APTD-0576. March 1972.

2. Wortman, Martin, R. Vollaro, and P.R. Westlin. Dry Gas Volume Meter Calibrations. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. Vol. 2, No. 2. May 1977.

3. Westlin, P.R., and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. Vol. 3, No. 1. February 1978.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]

Method 2B—Determination of Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate From Gasoline Vapor Incinerators

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should also have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 2A, Method 10, Method 25A, Method 25B.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of exhaust volume flow rate from incinerators that process gasoline vapors consisting primarily of alkanes, alkenes, and/or arenes (aromatic hydrocarbons). It is assumed that the amount of auxiliary fuel is negligible.

1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 Organic carbon concentration and volume flow rate are measured at the incinerator inlet using either Method 25A or Method 25B and Method 2A, respectively. Organic carbon, carbon dioxide (CO₂), and carbon monoxide (CO) concentrations are measured at the outlet using either Method 25A or Method 25B and Method 10, respectively. The ratio of total carbon at the incinerator inlet and outlet is multiplied by the inlet volume to determine the exhaust volume flow rate.

3.0 Definitions

Same as Section 3.0 of Method 10 and Method 25A.

4.0 Interferences

Same as Section 4.0 of Method 10.

5.0 Safety

5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Same as Section 6.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable, with the addition of the following:

6.1 This analyzer must meet the specifications set forth in Section 6.1.2 of Method 10, except that the span shall be 15 percent CO₂ by volume.

7.0 Reagents and Standards

Same as Section 7.0 of Method 10 and Method 25A, with the following addition and exceptions:

7.1 Carbon Dioxide Analyzer Calibration. CO₂ gases meeting the specifications set forth in Section 7 of Method 6C are required.

7.2 Hydrocarbon Analyzer Calibration. Methane shall not be used as a calibration gas when performing this method.

7.3 Fuel Gas. If Method 25B is used to measure the organic carbon concentrations at both the inlet and exhaust, no fuel gas is required.

8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis

8.1 Pre-test Procedures. Perform all pre-test procedures (e.g., system performance checks, leak checks) necessary to determine gas volume flow rate and organic carbon concentration in the vapor line to the incinerator inlet and to determine organic carbon, carbon monoxide, and carbon dioxide concentrations at the incinerator exhaust, as outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable.

8.2 Sampling. At the beginning of the test period, record the initial parameters for the inlet volume meter according to the procedures in Method 2A and mark all of the recorder strip charts to indicate the start of the test. Conduct sampling and analysis as outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable. Continue recording inlet organic and exhaust CO₂, CO, and organic concentrations throughout the test. During periods of process interruption and halting of gas flow, stop the timer and mark the recorder strip charts so that data from this interruption are not included in the calculations. At the end of the test period, record the final parameters for the inlet volume meter and mark the end on all of the recorder strip charts.

8.3 Post-test Procedures. Perform all post-test procedures (e.g., drift tests, leak checks), as outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable.

9.0 Quality Control

Same as Section 9.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

Same as Section 10.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.

Note:

If a manifold system is used for the exhaust analyzers, all the analyzers and sample pumps must be operating when the analyzer calibrations are performed.

10.1 If an analyzer output does not meet the specifications of the method, invalidate the test data for the period. Alternatively, calculate the exhaust volume results using initial calibration data and using final calibration data and report both resulting volumes. Then, for emissions calculations, use the volume measurement resulting in the greatest emission rate or concentration.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see Section 8.0).

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Carry out the calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation.

12.1 Nomenclature.

Co_e = Mean carbon monoxide concentration in system exhaust, ppm.

(CO₂)₂ = Ambient carbon dioxide concentration, ppm (if not measured during the test period, may be assumed to equal 300 ppm).

(CO₂)_e = Mean carbon dioxide concentration in system exhaust, ppm.

HC_e = Mean organic concentration in system exhaust as defined by the calibration gas, ppm.

Hc_i = Mean organic concentration in system inlet as defined by the calibration gas, ppm.

K_e = Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for the exhaust hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless [equal to the number of carbon atoms per molecule of the gas used to calibrate the analyzer (2 for ethane, 3 for propane, etc.)].

K_i = Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for the inlet hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless.

V_es = Exhaust gas volume, m³.

V_is = Inlet gas volume, m³.

Q_es = Exhaust gas volume flow rate, m³/min.

Q_is = Inlet gas volume flow rate, m³/min.

θ = Sample run time, min.

s = Standard conditions: 20 °C, 760 mm Hg.

12.2 Concentrations. Determine mean concentrations of inlet organics, outlet CO₂, outlet CO, and outlet organics according to the procedures in the respective methods and the analyzers' calibration curves, and for the time intervals specified in the applicable regulations.

12.3 Exhaust Gas Volume. Calculate the exhaust gas volume as follows:

12.4 Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate. Calculate the exhaust gas volume flow rate as follows:

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

Same as Section 16.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]

Method 2C—Determination of Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate in Small Stacks or Ducts (Standard Pitot Tube)

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should also have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of average velocity and volumetric flow rate of gas streams in small stacks or ducts. Limits on the applicability of this method are identical to those set forth in Method 2, Section 1.0, except that this method is limited to stationary source stacks or ducts less than about 0.30 meter (12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m² (113 in.²) in cross-sectional area, but equal to or greater than about 0.10 meter (4 in.) in diameter, or 0.0081 m² (12.57 in.²) in cross-sectional area.

1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack or duct is determined from the gas density and from measurement of velocity heads with a standard pitot tube.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Same as Method 2, Section 6.0, with the exception of the following:

6.1 Standard Pitot Tube (instead of Type S). A standard pitot tube which meets the specifications of Section 6.7 of Method 2. Use a coefficient of 0.99 unless it is calibrated against another standard pitot tube with a NIST-traceable coefficient (see Section 10.2 of Method 2).

6.2 Alternative Pitot Tube. A modified hemispherical-nosed pitot tube (see Figure 2C-1), which features a shortened stem and enlarged impact and static pressure holes. Use a coefficient of 0.99 unless it is calibrated as mentioned in Section 6.1 above. This pitot tube is useful in particulate liquid droplet-laden gas streams when a “back purge” is ineffective.

7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]

8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis

8.1 Follow the general procedures in Section 8.0 of Method 2, except conduct the measurements at the traverse points specified in Method 1A. The static and impact pressure holes of standard pitot tubes are susceptible to plugging in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, adequate proof that the openings of the pitot tube have not plugged during the traverse period must be furnished; this can be done by taking the velocity head (Δp) heading at the final traverse point, cleaning out the impact and static holes of the standard pitot tube by “back-purging” with pressurized air, and then taking another Δp reading. If the Δp readings made before and after the air purge are the same (within ±5 percent) the traverse is acceptable. Otherwise, reject the run. Note that if the Δp at the final traverse point is unsuitably low, another point may be selected. If “back purging” at regular intervals is part of the procedure, then take comparative Δp readings, as above, for the last two back purges at which suitably high Δp readings are observed.

9.0 Quality Control

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

Same as Method 2, Sections 10.2 through 10.4.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see Section 8.0).

12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis

Same as Method 2, Section 12.0.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

Same as Method 2, Section 16.0.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Image Not Available

Method 2D—Measurement of Gas Volume Flow Rates in Small Pipes and Ducts

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should also have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, and Method 2A.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of the volumetric flow rates of gas streams in small pipes and ducts. It can be applied to intermittent or variable gas flows only with particular caution.

1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 All the gas flow in the pipe or duct is directed through a rotameter, orifice plate or similar device to measure flow rate or pressure drop. The device has been previously calibrated in a manner that insures its proper calibration for the gas being measured. Absolute temperature and pressure measurements are made to allow correction of volumetric flow rates to standard conditions.

3.0 Definitions. [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences. [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be considered acceptable.

6.1 Gas Metering Rate or Flow Element Device. A rotameter, orifice plate, or other volume rate or pressure drop measuring device capable of measuring the stack flow rate to within ±5 percent. The metering device shall be equipped with a temperature gauge accurate to within ±2 percent of the minimum absolute stack temperature and a pressure gauge (accurate to within ±5 mm Hg). The capacity of the metering device shall be sufficient for the expected maximum and minimum flow rates at the stack gas conditions. The magnitude and variability of stack gas flow rate, molecular weight, temperature, pressure, dewpoint, and corrosive characteristics, and pipe or duct size are factors to consider in choosing a suitable metering device.

6.2 Barometer. Same as Method 2, Section 6.5.

6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement to within 1 second.

7.0 Reagents and Standards. [Reserved]

8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis

8.1 Installation and Leak Check. Same as Method 2A, Sections 8.1 and 8.2, respectively.

8.2 Volume Rate Measurement.

8.2.1 Continuous, Steady Flow. At least once an hour, record the metering device flow rate or pressure drop reading, and the metering device temperature and pressure. Make a minimum of 12 equally spaced readings of each parameter during the test period. Record the barometric pressure at the beginning and end of the test period. Record the data on a table similar to that shown in Figure 2D-1.

8.2.2 Noncontinuous and Nonsteady Flow. Use volume rate devices with particular caution. Calibration will be affected by variation in stack gas temperature, pressure and molecular weight. Use the procedure in Section 8.2.1 with the addition of the following: Record all the metering device parameters on a time interval frequency sufficient to adequately profile each process cyclical or noncontinuous event. A multichannel continuous recorder may be used.

9.0 Quality Control

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

Same as Method 2A, Section 10.0, with the following exception:

10.1 Gas Metering Device. Same as Method 2A, Section 10.1, except calibrate the metering device with the principle stack gas to be measured (examples: air, nitrogen) against a standard reference meter. A calibrated dry gas meter is an acceptable reference meter. Ideally, calibrate the metering device in the field with the actual gas to be metered. For metering devices that have a volume rate readout, calculate the test metering device calibration coefficient, Y_m, for each run shown in Equation 2D-2 Section 12.3.

10.2 For metering devices that do not have a volume rate readout, refer to the manufacturer's instructions to calculate the V_m2 corresponding to each V_r.

10.3 Temperature Gauge. Use the procedure and specifications in Method 2A, Section 10.2. Perform the calibration at a temperature that approximates field test conditions.

10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer to be used in the field test with a mercury barometer prior to the field test.

11.0 Analytical Procedure.

Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see Section 8.0).

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

12.1 Nomenclature.

P_bar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).

P_m = Test meter average static pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).

Q_r = Reference meter volume flow rate reading, m³/min (ft³/min).

Q_m = Test meter volume flow rate reading, m³/min (ft³/min).

T_r = Absolute reference meter average temperature, °K (°R).

T_m = Absolute test meter average temperature, °K (°R).

K_l = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units, = 17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.

12.2 Gas Flow Rate.

12.3 Test Meter Device Calibration Coefficient. Calculation for testing metering device calibration coefficient, Y_m.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

1. Spink, L.K. Principles and Practice of Flowmeter Engineering. The Foxboro Company. Foxboro, MA. 1967.

2. Benedict, R.P. Fundamentals of Temperature, Pressure, and Flow Measurements. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, NY. 1969.

3. Orifice Metering of Natural Gas. American Gas Association. Arlington, VA. Report No. 3. March 1978. 88 pp.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Plant

Date

Run No.

Sample location

Barometric pressure (mm Hg):

Start

Finish

Operators

Metering device No.

Calibration coefficient

Calibration gas

Date to recalibrate

Figure 2D-1. Volume Flow Rate Measurement Data

Method 2E—Determination of Landfill Gas Production Flow Rate

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should also have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Methods 2 and 3C.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of landfill gas (LFG) production flow rate from municipal solid waste landfills and is used to calculate the flow rate of nonmethane organic compounds (NMOC) from landfills.

1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 Extraction wells are installed either in a cluster of three or at five dispersed locations in the landfill. A blower is used to extract LFG from the landfill. LFG composition, landfill pressures, and orifice pressure differentials from the wells are measured and the landfill gas production flow rate is calculated.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Since this method is complex, only experienced personnel should perform the test. Landfill gas contains methane, therefore explosive mixtures may exist at or near the landfill. It is advisable to take appropriate safety precautions when testing landfills, such as refraining from smoking and installing explosion-proof equipment.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

6.1 Well Drilling Rig. Capable of boring a 0.61 m (24 in.) diameter hole into the landfill to a minimum of 75 percent of the landfill depth. The depth of the well shall not extend to the bottom of the landfill or the liquid level.

6.2 Gravel. No fines. Gravel diameter should be appreciably larger than perforations stated in Sections 6.10 and 8.2.

6.3 Bentonite.

6.4 Backfill Material. Clay, soil, and sandy loam have been found to be acceptable.

6.5 Extraction Well Pipe. Minimum diameter of 3 in., constructed of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), high density polyethylene (HDPE), fiberglass, stainless steel, or other suitable nonporous material capable of transporting landfill gas.

6.6 Above Ground Well Assembly. Valve capable of adjusting gas flow, such as a gate, ball, or butterfly valve; sampling ports at the well head and outlet; and a flow measuring device, such as an in-line orifice meter or pitot tube. A schematic of the aboveground well head assembly is shown in Figure 2E-1.

6.7 Cap. Constructed of PVC or HDPE.

6.8 Header Piping. Constructed of PVC or HDPE.

6.9 Auger. Capable of boring a 0.15-to 0.23-m (6-to 9-in.) diameter hole to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section of the extraction well, for pressure probe installation.

6.10 Pressure Probe. Constructed of PVC or stainless steel (316), 0.025-m (1-in.). Schedule 40 pipe. Perforate the bottom two-thirds. A minimum requirement for perforations is slots or holes with an open area equivalent to four 0.006-m (1/4-in.) diameter holes spaced 90° apart every 0.15 m (6 in.).

6.11 Blower and Flare Assembly. Explosion-proof blower, capable of extracting LFG at a flow rate of 8.5 m ³/min (300 ft ³/min), a water knockout, and flare or incinerator.

6.12 Standard Pitot Tube and Differential Pressure Gauge for Flow Rate Calibration with Standard Pitot. Same as Method 2, Sections 6.7 and 6.8.

6.13 Orifice Meter. Orifice plate, pressure tabs, and pressure measuring device to measure the LFG flow rate.

6.14 Barometer. Same as Method 4, Section 6.1.5.

6.15 Differential Pressure Gauge. Water-filled U-tube manometer or equivalent, capable of measuring within 0.02 mm Hg (0.01 in. H₂ O), for measuring the pressure of the pressure probes.

7.0 Reagents and Standards. Not Applicable

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport

8.1 Placement of Extraction Wells. The landfill owner or operator may install a single cluster of three extraction wells in a test area or space five equal-volume wells over the landfill. The cluster wells are recommended but may be used only if the composition, age of the refuse, and the landfill depth of the test area can be determined.

8.1.1 Cluster Wells. Consult landfill site records for the age of the refuse, depth, and composition of various sections of the landfill. Select an area near the perimeter of the landfill with a depth equal to or greater than the average depth of the landfill and with the average age of the refuse between 2 and 10 years old. Avoid areas known to contain nondecomposable materials, such as concrete and asbestos. Locate the cluster wells as shown in Figure 2E-2.

8.1.1.1 The age of the refuse in a test area will not be uniform, so calculate a weighted average age of the refuse as shown in Section 12.2.

8.1.2 Equal Volume Wells. Divide the sections of the landfill that are at least 2 years old into five areas representing equal volumes. Locate an extraction well near the center of each area.

8.2 Installation of Extraction Wells. Use a well drilling rig to dig a 0.6 m (24 in.) diameter hole in the landfill to a minimum of 75 percent of the landfill depth, not to extend to the bottom of the landfill or the liquid level. Perforate the bottom two thirds of the extraction well pipe. A minimum requirement for perforations is holes or slots with an open area equivalent to 0.01-m (0.5-in.) diameter holes spaced 90° apart every 0.1 to 0.2 m (4 to 8 in.). Place the extraction well in the center of the hole and backfill with gravel to a level 0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated section. Add a layer of backfill material 1.2 m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite 0.9 m (3 ft) thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover material or material equal in permeability to the existing cover material. The specifications for extraction well installation are shown in Figure 2E-3.

8.3 Pressure Probes. Shallow pressure probes are used in the check for infiltration of air into the landfill, and deep pressure probes are use to determine the radius of influence. Locate pressure probes along three radial arms approximately 120° apart at distances of 3, 15, 30, and 45 m (10, 50, 100, and 150 ft) from the extraction well. The tester has the option of locating additional pressure probes at distances every 15 m (50 feet) beyond 45 m (150 ft). Example placements of probes are shown in Figure 2E-4. The 15-, 30-, and 45-m, (50-, 100-, and 150-ft) probes from each well, and any additional probes located along the three radial arms (deep probes), shall extend to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section of the extraction wells. All other probes (shallow probes) shall extend to a depth equal to half the depth of the deep probes.

8.3.1 Use an auger to dig a hole, 0.15- to 0.23-m (6-to 9-in.) in diameter, for each pressure probe. Perforate the bottom two thirds of the pressure probe. A minimum requirement for perforations is holes or slots with an open area equivalent to four 0.006-m (0.25-in.) diameter holes spaced 90° apart every 0.15 m (6 in.). Place the pressure probe in the center of the hole and backfill with gravel to a level 0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated section. Add a layer of backfill material at least 1.2 m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite at least 0.3 m (1 ft) thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover material or material equal in permeability to the existing cover material. The specifications for pressure probe installation are shown in Figure 2E-5.

8.4 LFG Flow Rate Measurement. Place the flow measurement device, such as an orifice meter, as shown in Figure 2E-1. Attach the wells to the blower and flare assembly. The individual wells may be ducted to a common header so that a single blower, flare assembly, and flow meter may be used. Use the procedures in Section 10.1 to calibrate the flow meter.

8.5 Leak-Check. A leak-check of the above ground system is required for accurate flow rate measurements and for safety. Sample LFG at the well head sample port and at the outlet sample port. Use Method 3C to determine nitrogen (N₂) concentrations. Determine the difference between the well head and outlet N₂ concentrations using the formula in Section 12.3. The system passes the leak-check if the difference is less than 10,000 ppmv.

8.6 Static Testing. Close the control valves on the well heads during static testing. Measure the gauge pressure (P_g) at each deep pressure probe and the barometric pressure (P_bar) every 8 hours (hr) for 3 days. Convert the gauge pressure of each deep pressure probe to absolute pressure using the equation in Section 12.4. Record as P_i (initial absolute pressure).

8.6.1 For each probe, average all of the 8-hr deep pressure probe readings (P_i) and record as P_ia (average absolute pressure). P_ia is used in Section 8.7.5 to determine the maximum radius of influence.

8.6.2 Measure the static flow rate of each well once during static testing.

8.7 Short-Term Testing. The purpose of short-term testing is to determine the maximum vacuum that can be applied to the wells without infiltration of ambient air into the landfill. The short-term testing is performed on one well at a time. Burn all LFG with a flare or incinerator.

8.7.1 Use the blower to extract LFG from a single well at a rate at least twice the static flow rate of the respective well measured in Section 8.6.2. If using a single blower and flare assembly and a common header system, close the control valve on the wells not being measured. Allow 24 hr for the system to stabilize at this flow rate.

8.7.2 Test for infiltration of air into the landfill by measuring the gauge pressures of the shallow pressure probes and using Method 3C to determine the LFG N₂ concentration. If the LFG N₂ concentration is less than 5 percent and all of the shallow probes have a positive gauge pressure, increase the blower vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H₂ O), wait 24 hr, and repeat the tests for infiltration. Continue the above steps of increasing blower vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H₂ O), waiting 24 hr, and testing for infiltration until the concentration of N₂ exceeds 5 percent or any of the shallow probes have a negative gauge pressure. When this occurs,reduce the blower vacuum to the maximum setting at which the N₂ concentration was less than 5 percent and the gauge pressures of the shallow probes are positive.

8.7.3 At this blower vacuum, measure atmospheric pressure (P_bar) every 8 hr for 24 hr, and record the LFG flow rate (Q_s) and the probe gauge pressures (P_f) for all of the probes. Convert the gauge pressures of the deep probes to absolute pressures for each 8-hr reading at Q_s as shown in Section 12.4.

8.7.4 For each probe, average the 8-hr deep pressure probe absolute pressure readings and record as P_fa (the final average absolute pressure).

8.7.5 For each probe, compare the initial average pressure (P_ia) from Section 8.6.1 to the final average pressure (P_fa). Determine the furthermost point from the well head along each radial arm where P_fa ≤ P_ia. This distance is the maximum radius of influence (R_m), which is the distance from the well affected by the vacuum. Average these values to determine the average maximum radius of influence (R_ma).

8.7.6 Calculate the depth (D_st) affected by the extraction well during the short term test as shown in Section 12.6. If the computed value of D_st exceeds the depth of the landfill, set D_st equal to the landfill depth.

8.7.7 Calculate the void volume (V) for the extraction well as shown in Section 12.7.

8.7.8 Repeat the procedures in Section 8.7 for each well.

8.8 Calculate the total void volume of the test wells (V_v) by summing the void volumes (V) of each well.

8.9 Long-Term Testing. The purpose of long-term testing is to extract two void volumes of LFG from the extraction wells. Use the blower to extract LFG from the wells. If a single Blower and flare assembly and common header system are used, open all control valves and set the blower vacuum equal to the highest stabilized blower vacuum demonstrated by any individual well in Section 8.7. Every 8 hr, sample the LFG from the well head sample port, measure the gauge pressures of the shallow pressure probes, the blower vacuum, the LFG flow rate, and use the criteria for infiltration in Section 8.7.2 and Method 3C to test for infiltration. If infiltration is detected, do not reduce the blower vacuum, instead reduce the LFG flow rate from the well by adjusting the control valve on the well head. Adjust each affected well individually. Continue until the equivalent of two total void volumes (V_v) have been extracted, or until V_t = 2V_v.

8.9.1 Calculate V_t, the total volume of LFG extracted from the wells, as shown in Section 12.8.

8.9.2 Record the final stabilized flow rate as Q_f and the gauge pressure for each deep probe. If, during the long term testing, the flow rate does not stabilize, calculate Q_f by averaging the last 10 recorded flow rates.

8.9.3 For each deep probe, convert each gauge pressure to absolute pressure as in Section 12.4. Average these values and record as P_sa. For each probe, compare P_ia to P_sa. Determine the furthermost point from the well head along each radial arm where P_sa ≤ P_ia. This distance is the stabilized radius of influence. Average these values to determine the average stabilized radius of influence (R_sa).

8.10 Determine the NMOC mass emission rate using the procedures in Section 12.9 through 12.15.

9.0 Quality Control

9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

10.1 LFG Flow Rate Meter (Orifice) Calibration Procedure. Locate a standard pitot tube in line with an orifice meter. Use the procedures in Section 8, 12.5, 12.6, and 12.7 of Method 2 to determine the average dry gas volumetric flow rate for at least five flow rates that bracket the expected LFG flow rates, except in Section 8.1, use a standard pitot tube rather than a Type S pitot tube. Method 3C may be used to determine the dry molecular weight. It may be necessary to calibrate more than one orifice meter in order to bracket the LFG flow rates. Construct a calibration curve by plotting the pressure drops across the orifice meter for each flow rate versus the average dry gas volumetric flow rate in m\3\/min of the gas.

11.0 Procedures [Reserved]

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

12.1 Nomenclature.

A = Age of landfill, yr.

A_avg = Average age of the refuse tested, yr.

A_i = Age of refuse in the ith fraction, yr.

A_r = Acceptance rate, Mg/yr.

C_NMOC = NMOC concentration, ppmv as hexane (C_NMOC = C_t/6).

C_o = Concentration of N₂ at the outlet, ppmv.

C_t = NMOC concentration, ppmv (carbon equivalent) from Method 25C.

C_w = Concentration of N₂ at the wellhead, ppmv.

D = Depth affected by the test wells, m.

D_st = Depth affected by the test wells in the short-term test, m.

e = Base number for natural logarithms (2.718).

f = Fraction of decomposable refuse in the landfill.

f_i = Fraction of the refuse in the ith section.

k = Landfill gas generation constant, yr⁻\1\.

L_o = Methane generation potential, m\3\/Mg.

L_o′ = Revised methane generation potential to account for the amount of nondecomposable material in the landfill, m\3\/Mg.

M_i = Mass of refuse in the ith section, Mg.

M_r = Mass of decomposable refuse affected by the test well, Mg.

P_bar = Atmospheric pressure, mm Hg.

P_f = Final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during short-term testing, mm Hg.

P_fa = Average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during short-term testing, mm Hg.

P_gf = final gauge pressure of the deep pressure probes, mm Hg.

P_gi = Initial gauge pressure of the deep pressure probes, mm Hg.

P_i = Initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during static testing, mm Hg.

P_ia = Average initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during static testing, mm Hg.

P_s = Final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during long-term testing, mm Hg.

P_sa = Average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during long-term testing, mm Hg.

Q_f = Final stabilized flow rate, m\3\/min.

Q_i = LFG flow rate measured at orifice meter during the ith interval, m\3\/min.

Q_s = Maximum LFG flow rate at each well determined by short-term test, m\3\/min.

Q_t = NMOC mass emission rate, m\3\/min.

R_m = Maximum radius of influence, m.

R_ma = Average maximum radius of influence, m.

R_s = Stabilized radius of influence for an individual well, m.

R_sa = Average stabilized radius of influence, m.

t_i = Age of section i, yr.

t_t = Total time of long-term testing, yr.

t_vi = Time of the ith interval (usually 8), hr.

V = Void volume of test well, m\3\.

V_r = Volume of refuse affected by the test well, m\3\.

V_t = Total volume of refuse affected by the long-term testing, m\3\.

V_v = Total void volume affected by test wells, m\3\.

WD = Well depth, m.

ρ = Refuse density, Mg/m\3\ (Assume 0.64 Mg/m\3\ if data are unavailable).

12.2 Use the following equation to calculate a weighted average age of landfill refuse.

12.3 Use the following equation to determine the difference in N₂ concentrations (ppmv) at the well head and outlet location.

12.4 Use the following equation to convert the gauge pressure (P_g) of each initial deep pressure probe to absolute pressure (P_i).

12.5 Use the following equation to convert the gauge pressures of the deep probes to absolute pressures for each 8-hr reading at Q_s.

12.6 Use the following equation to calculate the depth (D_st) affected by the extraction well during the short-term test.

12.7 Use the following equation to calculate the void volume for the extraction well (V).

12.8 Use the following equation to calculate V_t, the total volume of LFG extracted from the wells.

12.9 Use the following equation to calculate the depth affected by the test well. If using cluster wells, use the average depth of the wells for WD. If the value of D is greater than the depth of the landfill, set D equal to the landfill depth.

12.10 Use the following equation to calculate the volume of refuse affected by the test well.

12.11 Use the following equation to calculate the mass affected by the test well.

12.12 Modify L_o to account for the nondecomposable refuse in the landfill.

12.13 In the following equation, solve for k (landfill gas generation constant) by iteration. A suggested procedure is to select a value for k, calculate the left side of the equation, and if not equal to zero, select another value for k. Continue this process until the left hand side of the equation equals zero, ±0.001.

12.14 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass emission rate if the yearly acceptance rate of refuse has been consistent (10 percent) over the life of the landfill.

12.15 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass emission rate if the acceptance rate has not been consistent over the life of the landfill.

13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]

16.0 References

1. Same as Method 2, Appendix A, 40 CFR Part 60.

2. Emcon Associates, Methane Generation and Recovery from Landfills. Ann Arbor Science, 1982.

3. The Johns Hopkins University, Brown Station Road Landfill Gas Resource Assessment, Volume 1: Field Testing and Gas Recovery Projections. Laurel, Maryland: October 1982.

4. Mandeville and Associates, Procedure Manual for Landfill Gases Emission Testing.

5. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of North America, to Thorneloe, S., EPA. Response to July 28, 1988 request for additional information. August 18, 1988.

6. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of North America, to Wyatt, S., EPA. Response to December 7, 1988 request for additional information. January 16, 1989.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Method 3—Gas Analysis for the Determination of Dry Molecular Weight

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should also have a thorough knowledge of Method 1.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Analytes.

1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of CO₂ and O₂ concentrations and dry molecular weight of a sample from an effluent gas stream of a fossil-fuel combustion process or other process.

1.3 Other methods, as well as modifications to the procedure described herein, are also applicable for all of the above determinations. Examples of specific methods and modifications include: (1) A multi-point grab sampling method using an Orsat analyzer to analyze the individual grab sample obtained at each point; (2) a method for measuring either CO₂ or O₂ and using stoichiometric calculations to determine dry molecular weight; and (3) assigning a value of 30.0 for dry molecular weight, in lieu of actual measurements, for processes burning natural gas, coal, or oil. These methods and modifications may be used, but are subject to the approval of the Administrator. The method may also be applicable to other processes where it has been determined that compounds other than CO₂, O₂, carbon monoxide (CO), and nitrogen (N₂) are not present in concentrations sufficient to affect the results.

1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack by one of the following methods: (1) single-point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, integrated sampling; or (3) multi-point, integrated sampling. The gas sample is analyzed for percent CO₂ and percent O₂. For dry molecular weight determination, either an Orsat or a Fyrite analyzer may be used for the analysis.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences

4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to varying degrees, with the results of Orsat or Fyrite analyses. Compounds that interfere with CO₂ concentration measurement include acid gases (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydrogen chloride); compounds that interfere with O₂ concentration measurement include unsaturated hydrocarbons (e.g., acetone, acetylene), nitrous oxide, and ammonia. Ammonia reacts chemically with the O₂ absorbing solution, and when present in the effluent gas stream must be removed before analysis.

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

5.2 Corrosive Reagents.

5.2.1 A typical Orsat analyzer requires four reagents: a gas-confining solution, CO₂ absorbent, O₂ absorbent, and CO absorbent. These reagents may contain potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, cuprous chloride, cuprous sulfate, alkaline pyrogallic acid, and/or chromous chloride. Follow manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning labels for reagent use.

5.2.2 A typical Fyrite analyzer contains zinc chloride, hydrochloric acid, and either potassium hydroxide or chromous chloride. Follow manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning labels for reagent use.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Note:

As an alternative to the sampling apparatus and systems described herein, other sampling systems (e.g., liquid displacement) may be used, provided such systems are capable of obtaining a representative sample and maintaining a constant sampling rate, and are, otherwise, capable of yielding acceptable results. Use of such systems is subject to the approval of the Administrator.

6.1 Grab Sampling (See Figure 3-1).

6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or borosilicate glass tubing equipped with an in-stack or out-of-stack filter to remove particulate matter (a plug of glass wool is satisfactory for this purpose). Any other materials, resistant to temperature at sampling conditions and inert to all components of the gas stream, may be used for the probe. Examples of such materials may include aluminum, copper, quartz glass, and Teflon.

6.1.2 Pump. A one-way squeeze bulb, or equivalent, to transport the gas sample to the analyzer.

6.2 Integrated Sampling (Figure 3-2).

6.2.1 Probe. Same as in Section 6.1.1.

6.2.2 Condenser. An air-cooled or water-cooled condenser, or other condenser no greater than 250 ml that will not remove O₂, CO₂, CO, and N₂, to remove excess moisture which would interfere with the operation of the pump and flowmeter.

6.2.3 Valve. A needle valve, to adjust sample gas flow rate.

6.2.4 Pump. A leak-free, diaphragm-type pump, or equivalent, to transport sample gas to the flexible bag. Install a small surge tank between the pump and rate meter to eliminate the pulsation effect of the diaphragm pump on the rate meter.

6.2.5 Rate Meter. A rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring flow rate to ± 2 percent of the selected flow rate. A flow rate range of 500 to 1000 ml/min is suggested.

6.2.6 Flexible Bag. Any leak-free plastic (e.g., Tedlar, Mylar, Teflon) or plastic-coated aluminum (e.g., aluminized Mylar) bag, or equivalent, having a capacity consistent with the selected flow rate and duration of the test run. A capacity in the range of 55 to 90 liters (1.9 to 3.2 ft³) is suggested. To leak-check the bag, connect it to a water manometer, and pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm H₂ O (2 to 4 in. H₂ O). Allow to stand for 10 minutes. Any displacement in the water manometer indicates a leak. An alternative leak-check method is to pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in.) H₂ O and allow to stand overnight. A deflated bag indicates a leak.

6.2.7 Pressure Gauge. A water-filled U-tube manometer, or equivalent, of about 30 cm (12 in.), for the flexible bag leak-check.

6.2.8 Vacuum Gauge. A mercury manometer, or equivalent, of at least 760 mm (30 in.) Hg, for the sampling train leak-check.

6.3 Analysis. An Orsat or Fyrite type combustion gas analyzer.

7.0 Reagents and Standards

7.1 Reagents. As specified by the Orsat or Fyrite-type combustion analyzer manufacturer.

7.2 Standards. Two standard gas mixtures, traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards, to be used in auditing the accuracy of the analyzer and the analyzer operator technique:

7.2.1. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 percent O₂ and 14 to 18 percent CO₂.

7.2.2. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 percent CO₂ and about 15 percent O₂.

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport

8.1 Single Point, Grab Sampling Procedure.

8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall either be at the centroid of the cross section or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.0 m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.

8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-1, making sure all connections ahead of the analyzer are tight. If an Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the analyzer be leak-checked by following the procedure in Section 11.5; however, the leak-check is optional.

8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point. Purge the sampling line long enough to allow at least five exchanges. Draw a sample into the analyzer, and immediately analyze it for percent CO₂ and percent O₂ according to Section 11.2.

8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling Procedure.

8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall be located as specified in Section 8.1.1.

8.2.2 Leak-check (optional) the flexible bag as in Section 6.2.6. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2. Just before sampling, leak-check (optional) the train by placing a vacuum gauge at the condenser inlet, pulling a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plugging the outlet at the quick disconnect, and then turning off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 0.5 minute. Evacuate the flexible bag. Connect the probe, and place it in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point. Purge the sampling line. Next, connect the bag, and make sure that all connections are tight.

8.2.3 Sample Collection. Sample at a constant rate (±10 percent). The sampling run should be simultaneous with, and for the same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate determination. Collection of at least 28 liters (1.0 ft³) of sample gas is recommended; however, smaller volumes may be collected, if desired.

8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sample during each pollutant emission rate determination. Within 8 hours after the sample is taken, analyze it for percent CO₂ and percent O₂ using either an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite type combustion gas analyzer according to Section 11.3.

Note:

When using an Orsat analyzer, periodic Fyrite readings may be taken to verify/confirm the results obtained from the Orsat.

8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling Procedure.

8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, or by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of 12 traverse points shall be used for all other cases. The traverse points shall be located according to Method 1.

8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 8.2.2 through 8.2.4, except for the following: Traverse all sampling points, and sample at each point for an equal length of time. Record sampling data as shown in Figure 3-3.

9.0 Quality Control

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer operator's technique should be audited periodically as follows: take a sample from a manifold containing a known mixture of CO₂ and O₂, and analyze according to the procedure in Section 11.3. Repeat this procedure until the measured concentration of three consecutive samples agrees with the stated value ± 0.5 percent. If necessary, take corrective action, as specified in the analyzer users manual.

10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not be calibrated, but should be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instruction.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat or Fyrite-type analyzer should be maintained and operated according to the manufacturers specifications.

11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. Use either an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer to measure O₂ and CO₂ concentration for dry molecular weight determination, using procedures as specified in the analyzer user's manual. If an Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the Orsat leak-check, described in Section 11.5, be performed before this determination; however, the check is optional. Calculate the dry molecular weight as indicated in Section 12.0. Repeat the sampling, analysis, and calculation procedures until the dry molecular weights of any three grab samples differ from their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g-mole (0.3 lb/lb-mole). Average these three molecular weights, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 g/g-mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole).

11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. Use either an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer to measure O₂ and CO₂ concentration for dry molecular weight determination, using procedures as specified in the analyzer user's manual. If an Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the Orsat leak-check, described in Section 11.5, be performed before this determination; however, the check is optional. Calculate the dry molecular weight as indicated in Section 12.0. Repeat the analysis and calculation procedures until the individual dry molecular weights for any three analyses differ from their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g-mole (0.3 lb/lb-mole). Average these three molecular weights, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 g/g-mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole).

11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of the reagents and of operator technique should be conducted at least once every three series of test runs as outlined in Section 10.1.

11.5 Leak-Check Procedure for Orsat Analyzer. Moving an Orsat analyzer frequently causes it to leak. Therefore, an Orsat analyzer should be thoroughly leak-checked on site before the flue gas sample is introduced into it. The procedure for leak-checking an Orsat analyzer is as follows:

11.5.1 Bring the liquid level in each pipette up to the reference mark on the capillary tubing, and then close the pipette stopcock.

11.5.2 Raise the leveling bulb sufficiently to bring the confining liquid meniscus onto the graduated portion of the burette, and then close the manifold stopcock.

11.5.3 Record the meniscus position.

11.5.4 Observe the meniscus in the burette and the liquid level in the pipette for movement over the next 4 minutes.

11.5.5 For the Orsat analyzer to pass the leak-check, two conditions must be met:

11.5.5.1 The liquid level in each pipette must not fall below the bottom of the capillary tubing during this 4-minute interval.

11.5.5.2 The meniscus in the burette must not change by more than 0.2 ml during this 4-minute interval.

11.5.6 If the analyzer fails the leak-check procedure, check all rubber connections and stopcocks to determine whether they might be the cause of the leak. Disassemble, clean, and regrease any leaking stopcocks. Replace leaking rubber connections. After the analyzer is reassembled, repeat the leak-check procedure.

12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis

12.1 Nomenclature.

M_d = Dry molecular weight, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).

%CO₂ = Percent CO₂ by volume, dry basis.

%O₂ = Percent O₂ by volume, dry basis.

%CO = Percent CO by volume, dry basis.

%N₂ = Percent N₂ by volume, dry basis.

0.280  = Molecular weight of N₂ or CO, divided by 100.

0.320  = Molecular weight of O₂ divided by 100.

0.440  = Molecular weight of CO₂ divided by 100.

12.2 Nitrogen, Carbon Monoxide Concentration. Determine the percentage of the gas that is N₂ and CO by subtracting the sum of the percent CO₂ and percent O₂ from 100 percent.

12.3 Dry Molecular Weight. Use Equation 3-1 to calculate the dry molecular weight of the stack gas.

Note:

The above Equation 3-1 does not consider the effect on calculated dry molecular weight of argon in the effluent gas. The concentration of argon, with a molecular weight of 39.9, in ambient air is about 0.9 percent. A negative error of approximately 0.4 percent is introduced. The tester may choose to include argon in the analysis using procedures subject to approval of the Administrator.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

1. Altshuller, A.P. Storage of Gases and Vapors in Plastic Bags. International Journal of Air and Water Pollution. 6:75-81. 1963.

2. Conner, William D. and J.S. Nader. Air Sampling with Plastic Bags. Journal of the American Industrial Hygiene Association. 25:291-297. 1964.

3. Burrell Manual for Gas Analysts, Seventh edition. Burrell Corporation, 2223 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA. 15219. 1951.

4. Mitchell, W.J. and M.R. Midgett. Field Reliability of the Orsat Analyzer. Journal of Air Pollution Control Association. 26:491-495. May 1976.

5. Shigehara, R.T., R.M. Neulicht, and W.S. Smith. Validating Orsat Analysis Data from Fossil Fuel-Fired Units. Stack Sampling News. 4 (2):21-26. August 1976.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Figure 3-3. Sampling Rate Data

Method 3B—Gas Analysis for the Determination of Emission Rate Correction Factor or Excess Air

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1 and 3.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Analytes.

1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of O₂, CO₂, and CO concentrations in the effluent from fossil-fuel combustion processes for use in excess air or emission rate correction factor calculations. Where compounds other than CO₂, O₂, CO, and nitrogen (N₂) are present in concentrations sufficient to affect the results, the calculation procedures presented in this method must be modified, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

1.3 Other methods, as well as modifications to the procedure described herein, are also applicable for all of the above determinations. Examples of specific methods and modifications include: (1) A multi-point sampling method using an Orsat analyzer to analyze individual grab samples obtained at each point, and (2) a method using CO₂ or O₂ and stoichiometric calculations to determine excess air. These methods and modifications may be used, but are subject to the approval of the Administrator.

1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack by one of the following methods: (1) Single-point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, integrated sampling; or (3) multi-point, integrated sampling. The gas sample is analyzed for percent CO₂, percent O₂, and, if necessary, percent CO using an Orsat combustion gas analyzer.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences

4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to varying degrees, with the results of Orsat analyses. Compounds that interfere with CO2 concentration measurement include acid gases (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydrogen chloride); compounds that interfere with O₂ concentration measurement include unsaturated hydrocarbons (e.g., acetone, acetylene), nitrous oxide, and ammonia. Ammonia reacts chemically with the O₂ absorbing solution, and when present in the effluent gas stream must be removed before analysis.

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

5.2 Corrosive Reagents. A typical Orsat analyzer requires four reagents: a gas-confining solution, CO₂ absorbent, O₂ absorbent, and CO absorbent. These reagents may contain potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, cuprous chloride, cuprous sulfate, alkaline pyrogallic acid, and/or chromous chloride. Follow manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning labels for reagent use.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Note:

As an alternative to the sampling apparatus and systems described herein, other sampling systems (e.g., liquid displacement) may be used, provided such systems are capable of obtaining a representative sample and maintaining a constant sampling rate, and are, otherwise, capable of yielding acceptable results. Use of such systems is subject to the approval of the Administrator.

6.1 Grab Sampling and Integrated Sampling. Same as in Sections 6.1 and 6.2, respectively for Method 3.

6.2 Analysis. An Orsat analyzer only. For low CO₂ (less than 4.0 percent) or high O₂ (greater than 15.0 percent) concentrations, the measuring burette of the Orsat must have at least 0.1 percent subdivisions. For Orsat maintenance and operation procedures, follow the instructions recommended by the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified herein.

7.0 Reagents and Standards

7.1 Reagents. Same as in Method 3, Section 7.1.

7.2 Standards. Same as in Method 3, Section 7.2.

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport

Note:

Each of the three procedures below shall be used only when specified in an applicable subpart of the standards. The use of these procedures for other purposes must have specific prior approval of the Administrator. A Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer is not acceptable for excess air or emission rate correction factor determinations, unless approved by the Administrator. If both percent CO₂ and percent O₂ are measured, the analytical results of any of the three procedures given below may also be used for calculating the dry molecular weight (see Method 3).

8.1 Single-Point, Grab Sampling and Analytical Procedure.

8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall either be at the centroid of the cross section or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.0 m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.

8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-1 of Method 3, making sure all connections ahead of the analyzer are tight. Leak-check the Orsat analyzer according to the procedure described in Section 11.5 of Method 3. This leak-check is mandatory.

8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point; purge the sampling line long enough to allow at least five exchanges. Draw a sample into the analyzer. For emission rate correction factor determinations, immediately analyze the sample for percent CO₂ or percent O₂, as outlined in Section 11.2. For excess air determination, immediately analyze the sample for percent CO₂, O₂, and CO, as outlined in Section 11.2, and calculate excess air as outlined in Section 12.2.

8.1.4 After the analysis is completed, leak-check (mandatory) the Orsat analyzer once again, as described in Section 11.5 of Method 3. For the results of the analysis to be valid, the Orsat analyzer must pass this leak-test before and after the analysis.

8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling and Analytical Procedure.

8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall be located as specified in Section 8.1.1.

8.2.2 Leak-check (mandatory) the flexible bag as in Section 6.2.6 of Method 3. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2 of Method 3. Just before sampling, leak-check (mandatory) the train by placing a vacuum gauge at the condenser inlet, pulling a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plugging the outlet at the quick disconnect, and then turning off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 0.5 minute. Evacuate the flexible bag. Connect the probe, and place it in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point; purge the sampling line. Next, connect the bag, and make sure that all connections are tight.

8.2.3 Sample at a constant rate, or as specified by the Administrator. The sampling run must be simultaneous with, and for the same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate determination. Collect at least 28 liters (1.0 ft³) of sample gas. Smaller volumes may be collected, subject to approval of the Administrator.

8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sample during each pollutant emission rate determination. For emission rate correction factor determination, analyze the sample within 4 hours after it is taken for percent CO₂ or percent O₂ (as outlined in Section 11.2).

8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling and Analytical Procedure.

8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, or by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of 12 traverse points shall be used for all other cases. The traverse points shall be located according to Method 1.

8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in Sections 8.2.2 through 8.2.4, except for the following: Traverse all sampling points, and sample at each point for an equal length of time. Record sampling data as shown in Figure 3-3 of Method 3.

9.0 Quality Control

9.1 Data Validation Using Fuel Factor. Although in most instances, only CO₂ or O₂ measurement is required, it is recommended that both CO₂ and O₂ be measured to provide a check on the quality of the data. The data validation procedure of Section 12.3 is suggested.

Note:

Since this method for validating the CO₂ and O₂ analyses is based on combustion of organic and fossil fuels and dilution of the gas stream with air, this method does not apply to sources that (1) remove CO₂ or O₂ through processes other than combustion, (2) add O₂ (e.g., oxygen enrichment) and N₂ in proportions different from that of air, (3) add CO₂ (e.g., cement or lime kilns), or (4) have no fuel factor, F_O, values obtainable (e.g., extremely variable waste mixtures). This method validates the measured proportions of CO₂ and O₂ for fuel type, but the method does not detect sample dilution resulting from leaks during or after sample collection. The method is applicable for samples collected downstream of most lime or limestone flue-gas desulfurization units as the CO₂ added or removed from the gas stream is not significant in relation to the total CO₂ concentration. The CO₂ concentrations from other types of scrubbers using only water or basic slurry can be significantly affected and would render the fuel factor check minimally useful.

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer operator technique should be audited periodically as follows: take a sample from a manifold containing a known mixture of CO₂ and O₂, and analyze according to the procedure in Section 11.3. Repeat this procedure until the measured concentration of three consecutive samples agrees with the stated value ±0.5 percent. If necessary, take corrective action, as specified in the analyzer users manual.

10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not be calibrated, but should be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instruction.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat analyzer should be maintained according to the manufacturers specifications.

11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. To ensure complete absorption of the CO₂, O₂, or if applicable, CO, make repeated passes through each absorbing solution until two consecutive readings are the same. Several passes (three or four) should be made between readings. (If constant readings cannot be obtained after three consecutive readings, replace the absorbing solution.) Although in most cases, only CO₂ or O₂ concentration is required, it is recommended that both CO₂ and O₂ be measured, and that the procedure in Section 12.3 be used to validate the analytical data.

Note:

Since this single-point, grab sampling and analytical procedure is normally conducted in conjunction with a single-point, grab sampling and analytical procedure for a pollutant, only one analysis is ordinarily conducted. Therefore, great care must be taken to obtain a valid sample and analysis.

11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. The Orsat analyzer must be leak-checked (see Section 11.5 of Method 3) before the analysis. If excess air is desired, proceed as follows: (1) within 4 hours after the sample is taken, analyze it (as in Sections 11.3.1 through 11.3.3) for percent CO₂, O₂, and CO; (2) determine the percentage of the gas that is N₂ by subtracting the sum of the percent CO₂, percent O₂, and percent CO from 100 percent; and (3) calculate percent excess air, as outlined in Section 12.2.

11.3.1 To ensure complete absorption of the CO₂, O₂, or if applicable, CO, follow the procedure described in Section 11.2.

Note:

Although in most instances only CO₂ or O₂ is required, it is recommended that both CO₂ and O₂ be measured, and that the procedures in Section 12.3 be used to validate the analytical data.

11.3.2 Repeat the analysis until the following criteria are met:

11.3.2.1 For percent CO₂, repeat the analytical procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more than (a) 0.3 percent by volume when CO₂ is greater than 4.0 percent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when CO₂ is less than or equal to 4.0 percent. Average three acceptable values of percent CO₂, and report the results to the nearest 0.2 percent.

11.3.2.2 For percent O₂, repeat the analytical procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more than (a) 0.3 percent by volume when O₂ is less than 15.0 percent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when O₂ is greater than or equal to 15.0 percent. Average the three acceptable values of percent O₂, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 percent.

11.3.2.3 For percent CO, repeat the analytical procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more than 0.3 percent. Average the three acceptable values of percent CO, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 percent.

11.3.3 After the analysis is completed, leak-check (mandatory) the Orsat analyzer once again, as described in Section 11.5 of Method 3. For the results of the analysis to be valid, the Orsat analyzer must pass this leak-test before and after the analysis.

11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of the reagents and of operator technique should be conducted at least once every three series of test runs as indicated in Section 10.1.

12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis

12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Section 12.1 of Method 3 with the addition of the following:

%EA = Percent excess air.

0.264 = Ratio of O₂ to N₂ in air, v/v.

12.2 Percent Excess Air. Determine the percentage of the gas that is N₂ by subtracting the sum of the percent CO₂, percent CO, and percent O₂ from 100 percent. Calculate the percent excess air (if applicable) by substituting the appropriate values of percent O₂, CO, and N₂ into Equation 3B-1.

Note:

The equation above assumes that ambient air is used as the source of O₂ and that the fuel does not contain appreciable amounts of N₂ (as do coke oven or blast furnace gases). For those cases when appreciable amounts of N₂ are present (coal, oil, and natural gas do not contain appreciable amounts of N₂) or when oxygen enrichment is used, alternative methods, subject to approval of the Administrator, are required.

12.3 Data Validation When Both CO₂ and O₂ Are Measured.

12.3.1 Fuel Factor, F_o. Calculate the fuel factor (if applicable) using Equation 3B-2:

Where:

%O₂ = Percent O₂ by volume, dry basis.

%CO₂ = Percent CO₂ by volume, dry basis.

20.9 = Percent O₂ by volume in ambient air.

If CO is present in quantities measurable by this method, adjust the O₂ and CO₂ values using Equations 3B-3 and 3B-4 before performing the calculation for F_o:

Where:

%CO = Percent CO by volume, dry basis.

12.3.2 Compare the calculated F_o factor with the expected F_o values. Table 3B-1 in Section 17.0 may be used in establishing acceptable ranges for the expected F_o if the fuel being burned is known. When fuels are burned in combinations, calculate the combined fuel F_d and F_c factors (as defined in Method 19, Section 12.2) according to the procedure in Method 19, Sections 12.2 and 12.3. Then calculate the F_o factor according to Equation 3B-5.

12.3.3 Calculated F_o values, beyond the acceptable ranges shown in this table, should be investigated before accepting the test results. For example, the strength of the solutions in the gas analyzer and the analyzing technique should be checked by sampling and analyzing a known concentration, such as air; the fuel factor should be reviewed and verified. An acceptability range of ±12 percent is appropriate for the F_o factor of mixed fuels with variable fuel ratios. The level of the emission rate relative to the compliance level should be considered in determining if a retest is appropriate; i.e., if the measured emissions are much lower or much greater than the compliance limit, repetition of the test would not significantly change the compliance status of the source and would be unnecessarily time consuming and costly.

13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]

16.0 References

Same as Method 3, Section 16.0.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases

Note:

This method does not include all the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 5, and Method 6.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Analytes.

1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of the moisture content of stack gas.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 A gas sample is extracted at a constant rate from the source; moisture is removed from the sample stream and determined either volumetrically or gravimetrically.

2.2 The method contains two possible procedures: a reference method and an approximation method.

2.2.1 The reference method is used for accurate determinations of moisture content (such as are needed to calculate emission data). The approximation method, provides estimates of percent moisture to aid in setting isokinetic sampling rates prior to a pollutant emission measurement run. The approximation method described herein is only a suggested approach; alternative means for approximating the moisture content (e.g., drying tubes, wet bulb-dry bulb techniques, condensation techniques, stoichiometric calculations, previous experience, etc.) are also acceptable.

2.2.2 The reference method is often conducted simultaneously with a pollutant emission measurement run. When it is, calculation of percent isokinetic, pollutant emission rate, etc., for the run shall be based upon the results of the reference method or its equivalent. These calculations shall not be based upon the results of the approximation method, unless the approximation method is shown, to the satisfaction of the Administrator, to be capable of yielding results within one percent H₂ O of the reference method.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences

4.1 The moisture content of saturated gas streams or streams that contain water droplets, as measured by the reference method, may be positively biased. Therefore, when these conditions exist or are suspected, a second determination of the moisture content shall be made simultaneously with the reference method, as follows: Assume that the gas stream is saturated. Attach a temperature sensor [capable of measuring to ±1 °C (2 °F)] to the reference method probe. Measure the stack gas temperature at each traverse point (see Section 8.1.1.1) during the reference method traverse, and calculate the average stack gas temperature. Next, determine the moisture percentage, either by: (1) Using a psychrometric chart and making appropriate corrections if the stack pressure is different from that of the chart, or (2) using saturation vapor pressure tables. In cases where the psychrometric chart or the saturation vapor pressure tables are not applicable (based on evaluation of the process), alternative methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, shall be used.

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

6.1 Reference Method. A schematic of the sampling train used in this reference method is shown in Figure 4-1.

6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or glass tubing, sufficiently heated to prevent water condensation, and equipped with a filter, either in-stack (e.g., a plug of glass wool inserted into the end of the probe) or heated out-of-stack (e.g., as described in Method 5), to remove particulate matter. When stack conditions permit, other metals or plastic tubing may be used for the probe, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

6.1.2 Condenser. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.1.8.

6.1.3 Cooling System. An ice bath container, crushed ice, and water (or equivalent), to aid in condensing moisture.

6.1.4 Metering System. Same as in Method 5, Section 6.1.1.9, except do not use sampling systems designed for flow rates higher than 0.0283 m³/min (1.0 cfm). Other metering systems, capable of maintaining a constant sampling rate to within 10 percent and determining sample gas volume to within 2 percent, may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

6.1.5 Barometer and Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance. Same as Method 5, Sections 6.1.2 and 6.2.5, respectively.

6.2. Approximation Method. A schematic of the sampling train used in this approximation method is shown in Figure 4-2.

6.2.1 Probe. Same as Section 6.1.1.

6.2.2 Condenser. Two midget impingers, each with 30-ml capacity, or equivalent.

6.2.3 Cooling System. Ice bath container, crushed ice, and water, to aid in condensing moisture in impingers.

6.2.4 Drying Tube. Tube packed with new or regenerated 6- to 16-mesh indicating-type silica gel (or equivalent desiccant), to dry the sample gas and to protect the meter and pump.

6.2.5 Valve. Needle valve, to regulate the sample gas flow rate.

6.2.6 Pump. Leak-free, diaphragm type, or equivalent, to pull the gas sample through the train.

6.2.7 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter, sufficiently accurate to measure the sample volume to within 2 percent, and calibrated over the range of flow rates and conditions actually encountered during sampling.

6.2.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, to measure the flow range from 0 to 3 liters/min (0 to 0.11 cfm).

6.2.9 Graduated Cylinder. 25-ml.

6.2.10 Barometer. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.2.

6.2.11 Vacuum Gauge. At least 760-mm (30-in.) Hg gauge, to be used for the sampling leak check.

7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage

8.1 Reference Method. The following procedure is intended for a condenser system (such as the impinger system described in Section 6.1.1.8 of Method 5) incorporating volumetric analysis to measure the condensed moisture, and silica gel and gravimetric analysis to measure the moisture leaving the condenser.

8.1.1 Preliminary Determinations.

8.1.1.1 Unless otherwise specified by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine points shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of twelve traverse points shall be used in all other cases. The traverse points shall be located according to Method 1. The use of fewer points is subject to the approval of the Administrator. Select a suitable probe and probe length such that all traverse points can be sampled. Consider sampling from opposite sides of the stack (four total sampling ports) for large stacks, to permit use of shorter probe lengths. Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point.

8.1.1.2 Select a total sampling time such that a minimum total gas volume of 0.60 scm (21 scf) will be collected, at a rate no greater than 0.021 m³/min (0.75 cfm). When both moisture content and pollutant emission rate are to be determined, the moisture determination shall be simultaneous with, and for the same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate run, unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of the standards.

8.1.2 Preparation of Sampling Train.

8.1.2.1 Place known volumes of water in the first two impingers; alternatively, transfer water into the first two impingers and record the weight of each impinger (plus water) to the nearest 0.5 g. Weigh and record the weight of the silica gel to the nearest 0.5 g, and transfer the silica gel to the fourth impinger; alternatively, the silica gel may first be transferred to the impinger, and the weight of the silica gel plus impinger recorded.

8.1.2.2 Set up the sampling train as shown in Figure 4-1. Turn on the probe heater and (if applicable) the filter heating system to temperatures of approximately 120 °C (248 °F), to prevent water condensation ahead of the condenser. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. Place crushed ice and water in the ice bath container.

8.1.3 Leak Check Procedures. It is recommended, but not required, that the volume metering system and sampling train be leak-checked as follows:

8.1.3.1 Metering System. Same as Method 5, Section 8.4.1.

8.1.3.2 Sampling Train. Disconnect the probe from the first impinger or (if applicable) from the filter holder. Plug the inlet to the first impinger (or filter holder), and pull a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. A lower vacuum may be used, provided that it is not exceeded during the test. A leakage rate in excess of 4 percent of the average sampling rate or 0.00057 m³/min (0.020 cfm), whichever is less, is unacceptable. Following the leak check, reconnect the probe to the sampling train.

8.1.4 Sampling Train Operation. During the sampling run, maintain a sampling rate within 10 percent of constant rate, or as specified by the Administrator. For each run, record the data required on a data sheet similar to that shown in Figure 4-3. Be sure to record the dry gas meter reading at the beginning and end of each sampling time increment and whenever sampling is halted. Take other appropriate readings at each sample point at least once during each time increment.

Note:

When Method 4 is used concurrently with an isokinetic method (e.g., Method 5) the sampling rate should be maintained at isokinetic conditions rather than 10 percent of constant rate.

8.1.4.1 To begin sampling, position the probe tip at the first traverse point. Immediately start the pump, and adjust the flow to the desired rate. Traverse the cross section, sampling at each traverse point for an equal length of time. Add more ice and, if necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the silica gel outlet.

8.1.4.2 After collecting the sample, disconnect the probe from the first impinger (or from the filter holder), and conduct a leak check (mandatory) of the sampling train as described in Section 8.1.3.2. Record the leak rate. If the leakage rate exceeds the allowable rate, either reject the test results or correct the sample volume as in Section 12.3 of Method 5.

8.2 Approximation Method.

Note:

The approximation method described below is presented only as a suggested method (see Section 2.0).

8.2.1 Place exactly 5 ml water in each impinger. Leak check the sampling train as follows: Temporarily insert a vacuum gauge at or near the probe inlet. Then, plug the probe inlet and pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm (10 in.) Hg. Note the time rate of change of the dry gas meter dial; alternatively, a rotameter (0 to 40 ml/min) may be temporarily attached to the dry gas meter outlet to determine the leakage rate. A leak rate not in excess of 2 percent of the average sampling rate is acceptable.

Note:

Release the probe inlet plug slowly before turning off the pump.

8.2.2 Connect the probe, insert it into the stack, and sample at a constant rate of 2 liters/min (0.071 cfm). Continue sampling until the dry gas meter registers about 30 liters (1.1 ft³) or until visible liquid droplets are carried over from the first impinger to the second. Record temperature, pressure, and dry gas meter readings as indicated by Figure 4-4.

9.0 Quality Control

9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.

9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, Section 9.2.

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

Note:

Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.

10.1 Reference Method. Calibrate the metering system, temperature sensors, and barometer according to Method 5, Sections 10.3, 10.5, and 10.6, respectively.

10.2 Approximation Method. Calibrate the metering system and the barometer according to Method 6, Section 10.1 and Method 5, Section 10.6, respectively.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

11.1 Reference Method. Measure the volume of the moisture condensed in each of the impingers to the nearest ml. Alternatively, if the impingers were weighed prior to sampling, weigh the impingers after sampling and record the difference in weight to the nearest 0.5 g. Determine the increase in weight of the silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g. Record this information (see example data sheet, Figure 4-5), and calculate the moisture content, as described in Section 12.0.

11.2 Approximation Method. Combine the contents of the two impingers, and measure the volume to the nearest 0.5 ml.

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Carry out the following calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.

12.1 Reference Method.

12.1.1 Nomenclature.

B_ws = Proportion of water vapor, by volume, in the gas stream.

M_w = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-mole).

P_m = Absolute pressure (for this method, same as barometric pressure) at the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).

P_std = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).

R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 (mm Hg)(m³)/(g-mole)(°K) for metric units and 21.85 (in. Hg)(ft³)/(lb-mole)(°R) for English units.

T_m = Absolute temperature at meter, °K (°R).

T_std = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).

V_f = Final volume of condenser water, ml.

V_i = Initial volume, if any, of condenser water, ml.

V_m = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).

V_m(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).

V_wc(std) = Volume of water vapor condensed, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).

V_wsg(std) = Volume of water vapor collected in silica gel, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).

W_f = Final weight of silica gel or silica gel plus impinger, g.

W_i = Initial weight of silica gel or silica gel plus impinger, g.

Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.

ΔV_m = Incremental dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter at each traverse point, dcm (dcf).

ρ_w = Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml (0.002201 lb/ml).

12.1.2 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed.

Where:

K₁ = 0.001333 m³/ml for metric units,

= 0.04706 ft³/ml for English units.

12.1.3 Volume of Water Collected in Silica Gel.

Where:

K₂ = 1.0 g/g for metric units,

= 453.6 g/lb for English units.

K₃ = 0.001335 m³/g for metric units,

= 0.04715 ft³/g for English units.

12.1.4 Sample Gas Volume.

Where:

K₄ = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,

= 17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.

Note:

If the post-test leak rate (Section 8.1.4.2) exceeds the allowable rate, correct the value of Vm in Equation 4-3, as described in Section 12.3 of Method 5.

12.1.5 Moisture Content.

12.1.6 Verification of Constant Sampling Rate. For each time increment, determine the ΔV_m. Calculate the average. If the value for any time increment differs from the average by more than 10 percent, reject the results, and repeat the run.

12.1.7 In saturated or moisture droplet-laden gas streams, two calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made, one using a value based upon the saturated conditions (see Section 4.1), and another based upon the results of the impinger analysis. The lower of these two values of B_ws shall be considered correct.

12.2 Approximation Method. The approximation method presented is designed to estimate the moisture in the stack gas; therefore, other data, which are only necessary for accurate moisture determinations, are not collected. The following equations adequately estimate the moisture content for the purpose of determining isokinetic sampling rate settings.

12.2.1 Nomenclature.

B_wm = Approximate proportion by volume of water vapor in the gas stream leaving the second impinger, 0.025.

B_ws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.

M_w = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-mole).

P_m = Absolute pressure (for this method, same as barometric pressure) at the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).

P_std = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).

R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 [(mm Hg)(m³)]/[(g-mole)(K)] for metric units and 21.85 [(in. Hg)(ft³)]/[(lb-mole)(°R)] for English units.

T_m = Absolute temperature at meter, °K (°R).

T_std = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).

V_f = Final volume of impinger contents, ml.

V_i = Initial volume of impinger contents, ml.

V_m = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).

V_m(std) = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).

V_wc(std) = Volume of water vapor condensed, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).

Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.

ρ_w = Density of water, 0.09982 g/ml (0.002201 lb/ml).

12.2.2 Volume of Water Vapor Collected.

Where:

K₅ = 0.001333 m³/ml for metric units,

= 0.04706 ft³/ml for English units.

12.2.3 Sample Gas Volume.

Where:

K₆ = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,

= 17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.

12.2.4 Approximate Moisture Content.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 Alternative Procedures

The procedure described in Method 5 for determining moisture content is acceptable as a reference method.

17.0 References

1. Air Pollution Engineering Manual (Second Edition). Danielson, J.A. (ed.). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. AP-40. 1973.

2. Devorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Testing Manual. Air Pollution Control District, Los Angeles, CA. November 1963.

3. Methods for Determination of Velocity, Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Gases. Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manufacturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP-50. 1968.

18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Plant

Location

Operator

Date

Run No.

Ambient temperature

Barometric pressure

Probe Length

SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION

Location

Test

Date

Operator

Barometric pressure

Comments:

Figure 4-3. Moisture Determination—Reference Method

Figure 4-4. Example Moisture Determination Field Data Sheet_Approximation Method

Figure 4-5. Analytical Data_Reference Method

Method 5—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.

1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from stationary sources.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 120 ± 14°C (248 ± 25°F) or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application. The PM mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample collection:

6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train used in this method is shown in Figure 5-1 in Section 18.0. Complete construction details are given in APTD-0581 (Reference 2 in Section 17.0); commercial models of this train are also available. For changes from APTD-0581 and for allowable modifications of the train shown in Figure 5-1, see the following subsections.

Note:

The operating and maintenance procedures for the sampling train are described in APTD-0576 (Reference 3 in Section 17.0). Since correct usage is important in obtaining valid results, all users should read APTD-0576 and adopt the operating and maintenance procedures outlined in it, unless otherwise specified herein.

6.1.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Stainless steel (316) or glass with a sharp, tapered leading edge. The angle of taper shall be ≤30°, and the taper shall be on the outside to preserve a constant internal diameter. The probe nozzle shall be of the button-hook or elbow design, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator. If made of stainless steel, the nozzle shall be constructed from seamless tubing. Other materials of construction may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. A range of nozzle sizes suitable for isokinetic sampling should be available. Typical nozzle sizes range from 0.32 to 1.27 cm (1/8 to 1/2 in) inside diameter (ID) in increments of 0.16 cm (1/16 in). Larger nozzles sizes are also available if higher volume sampling trains are used. Each nozzle shall be calibrated, according to the procedures outlined in Section 10.1.

6.1.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz glass tubing with a heating system capable of maintaining a probe gas temperature during sampling of 120 ± 14 °C (248 ± 25 °F), or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or as approved by the Administrator for a particular application. Since the actual temperature at the outlet of the probe is not usually monitored during sampling, probes constructed according to APTD-0581 and utilizing the calibration curves of APTD-0576 (or calibrated according to the procedure outlined in APTD-0576) will be considered acceptable. Either borosilicate or quartz glass probe liners may be used for stack temperatures up to about 480 °C (900 °F); quartz glass liners shall be used for temperatures between 480 and 900 °C (900 and 1,650 °F). Both types of liners may be used at higher temperatures than specified for short periods of time, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The softening temperature for borosilicate glass is 820 °C (1500°F), and for quartz glass it is 1500 °C (2700 °F). Whenever practical, every effort should be made to use borosilicate or quartz glass probe liners. Alternatively, metal liners (e.g., 316 stainless steel, Incoloy 825 or other corrosion resistant metals) made of seamless tubing may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

6.1.1.3 Pitot Tube. Type S, as described in Section 6.1 of Method 2, or other device approved by the Administrator. The pitot tube shall be attached to the probe (as shown in Figure 5-1) to allow constant monitoring of the stack gas velocity. The impact (high pressure) opening plane of the pitot tube shall be even with or above the nozzle entry plane (see Method 2, Figure 2-7) during sampling. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall have a known coefficient, determined as outlined in Section 10.0 of Method 2.

6.1.1.4 Differential Pressure Gauge. Inclined manometer or equivalent device (two), as described in Section 6.2 of Method 2. One manometer shall be used for velocity head (Δp) readings, and the other, for orifice differential pressure readings.

6.1.1.5 Filter Holder. Borosilicate glass, with a glass frit filter support and a silicone rubber gasket. Other materials of construction (e.g., stainless steel, Teflon, or Viton) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The holder design shall provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. The holder shall be attached immediately at the outlet of the probe (or cyclone, if used).

6.1.1.6 Filter Heating System. Any heating system capable of maintaining a temperature around the filter holder of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) during sampling, or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application.

6.1.1.7 Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor capable of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (5.4 °F) shall be installed so that the sensing tip of the temperature sensor is in direct contact with the sample gas, and the temperature around the filter holder can be regulated and monitored during sampling.

6.1.1.8 Condenser. The following system shall be used to determine the stack gas moisture content: Four impingers connected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings. The first, third, and fourth impingers shall be of the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) ID glass tube extending to about 1.3 cm (1/2 in.) from the bottom of the flask. The second impinger shall be of the Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip. Modifications (e.g., using flexible connections between the impingers, using materials other than glass, or using flexible vacuum lines to connect the filter holder to the condenser) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The first and second impingers shall contain known quantities of water (Section 8.3.1), the third shall be empty, and the fourth shall contain a known weight of silica gel, or equivalent desiccant. A temperature sensor, capable of measuring temperature to within 1 °C (2 °F) shall be placed at the outlet of the fourth impinger for monitoring purposes. Alternatively, any system that cools the sample gas stream and allows measurement of the water condensed and moisture leaving the condenser, each to within 1 ml or 1 g may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. An acceptable technique involves the measurement of condensed water either gravimetrically or volumetrically and the determination of the moisture leaving the condenser by: (1) monitoring the temperature and pressure at the exit of the condenser and using Dalton's law of partial pressures; or (2) passing the sample gas stream through a tared silica gel (or equivalent desiccant) trap with exit gases kept below 20 °C (68 °F) and determining the weight gain. If means other than silica gel are used to determine the amount of moisture leaving the condenser, it is recommended that silica gel (or equivalent) still be used between the condenser system and pump to prevent moisture condensation in the pump and metering devices and to avoid the need to make corrections for moisture in the metered volume.

Note:

If a determination of the PM collected in the impingers is desired in addition to moisture content, the impinger system described above shall be used, without modification. Individual States or control agencies requiring this information shall be contacted as to the sample recovery and analysis of the impinger contents.

6.1.1.9 Metering System. Vacuum gauge, leak-free pump, temperature sensors capable of measuring temperature to within 3 °C (5.4 °F), dry gas meter (DGM) capable of measuring volume to within 2 percent, and related equipment, as shown in Figure 5-1. Other metering systems capable of maintaining sampling rates within 10 percent of isokinetic and of determining sample volumes to within 2 percent may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. When the metering system is used in conjunction with a pitot tube, the system shall allow periodic checks of isokinetic rates.

6.1.1.10 Sampling trains utilizing metering systems designed for higher flow rates than that described in APTD-0581 or APTD-0576 may be used provided that the specifications of this method are met.

6.1.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in.).

Note:

The barometric pressure reading may be obtained from a nearby National Weather Service station. In this case, the station value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested and an adjustment for elevation differences between the weather station and sampling point shall be made at a rate of minus 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in.) per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or plus 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in) per 30 m (100 ft) elevation decrease.

6.1.3 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Temperature sensor and pressure gauge, as described in Sections 6.3 and 6.4 of Method 2, and gas analyzer, if necessary, as described in Method 3. The temperature sensor shall, preferably, be permanently attached to the pitot tube or sampling probe in a fixed configuration, such that the tip of the sensor extends beyond the leading edge of the probe sheath and does not touch any metal. Alternatively, the sensor may be attached just prior to use in the field. Note, however, that if the temperature sensor is attached in the field, the sensor must be placed in an interference-free arrangement with respect to the Type S pitot tube openings (see Method 2, Figure 2-4). As a second alternative, if a difference of not more than 1 percent in the average velocity measurement is to be introduced, the temperature sensor need not be attached to the probe or pitot tube. (This alternative is subject to the approval of the Administrator.)

6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery:

6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes. Nylon bristle brushes with stainless steel wire handles. The probe brush shall have extensions (at least as long as the probe) constructed of stainless steel, Nylon, Teflon, or similarly inert material. The brushes shall be properly sized and shaped to brush out the probe liner and nozzle.

6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Two Glass wash bottles are recommended. Alternatively, polyethylene wash bottles may be used. It is recommended that acetone not be stored in polyethylene bottles for longer than a month.

6.2.3 Glass Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant, borosilicate glass bottles, for acetone washes, 500 ml or 1000 ml. Screw cap liners shall either be rubber-backed Teflon or shall be constructed so as to be leak-free and resistant to chemical attack by acetone. (Narrow mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone to leakage.) Alternatively, polyethylene bottles may be used.

6.2.4 Petri Dishes. For filter samples; glass or polyethylene, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.

6.2.5 Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance. To measure condensed water to within 1 ml or 0.5 g. Graduated cylinders shall have subdivisions no greater than 2 ml.

6.2.6 Plastic Storage Containers. Air-tight containers to store silica gel.

6.2.7 Funnel and Rubber Policeman. To aid in transfer of silica gel to container; not necessary if silica gel is weighed in the field.

6.2.8 Funnel. Glass or polyethylene, to aid in sample recovery.

6.3 Sample Analysis. The following equipment is required for sample analysis:

6.3.1 Glass Weighing Dishes.

6.3.2 Desiccator.

6.3.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.

6.3.4 Balance. To measure to within 0.5 g.

6.3.5 Beakers. 250 ml.

6.3.6 Hygrometer. To measure the relative humidity of the laboratory environment.

6.3.7 Temperature Sensor. To measure the temperature of the laboratory environment.

7.0 Reagents and Standards

7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:

7.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters, without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. The filter efficiency test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Method D 2986-71, 78, or 95a (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). Test data from the supplier's quality control program are sufficient for this purpose. In sources containing SO₂ or SO₃, the filter material must be of a type that is unreactive to SO₂ or SO₃. Reference 10 in Section 17.0 may be used to select the appropriate filter.

7.1.2 Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16 mesh. If previously used, dry at 175 °C (350 °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent or better) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

7.1.3 Water. When analysis of the material caught in the impingers is required, deionized distilled water (to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17)) shall be used. Run blanks prior to field use to eliminate a high blank on test samples.

7.1.4 Crushed Ice.

7.1.5 Stopcock Grease. Acetone-insoluble, heat-stable silicone grease. This is not necessary if screw-on connectors with Teflon sleeves, or similar, are used. Alternatively, other types of stopcock grease may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone, reagent grade, ≤0.001 percent residue, in glass bottles, is required. Acetone from metal containers generally has a high residue blank and should not be used. Sometimes, suppliers transfer acetone to glass bottles from metal containers; thus, acetone blanks shall be run prior to field use and only acetone with low blank values (≤0.001 percent) shall be used. In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of acetone used be subtracted from the sample weight.

7.3 Sample Analysis. The following reagents are required for sample analysis:

7.3.1 Acetone. Same as in Section 7.2.

7.3.2 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate, indicating type. Alternatively, other types of desiccants may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport

8.1 Pretest Preparation. It is suggested that sampling equipment be maintained according to the procedures described in APTD-0576.

8.1.1 Place 200 to 300 g of silica gel in each of several air-tight containers. Weigh each container, including silica gel, to the nearest 0.5 g, and record this weight. As an alternative, the silica gel need not be preweighed, but may be weighed directly in its impinger or sampling holder just prior to train assembly.

8.1.2 Check filters visually against light for irregularities, flaws, or pinhole leaks. Label filters of the proper diameter on the back side near the edge using numbering machine ink. As an alternative, label the shipping containers (glass or polyethylene petri dishes), and keep each filter in its identified container at all times except during sampling.

8.1.3 Desiccate the filters at 20 ± 5.6 °C (68 ± 10 °F) and ambient pressure for at least 24 hours. Weigh each filter (or filter and shipping container) at intervals of at least 6 hours to a constant weight (i.e., ≤0.5 mg change from previous weighing). Record results to the nearest 0.1 mg. During each weighing, the period for which the filter is exposed to the laboratory atmosphere shall be less than 2 minutes. Alternatively (unless otherwise specified by the Administrator), the filters may be oven dried at 105 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, desiccated for 2 hours, and weighed. Procedures other than those described, which account for relative humidity effects, may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

8.2 Preliminary Determinations.

8.2.1 Select the sampling site and the minimum number of sampling points according to Method 1 or as specified by the Administrator. Determine the stack pressure, temperature, and the range of velocity heads using Method 2; it is recommended that a leak check of the pitot lines (see Method 2, Section 8.1) be performed. Determine the moisture content using Approximation Method 4 or its alternatives for the purpose of making isokinetic sampling rate settings. Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight, as described in Method 2, Section 8.6; if integrated Method 3 sampling is used for molecular weight determination, the integrated bag sample shall be taken simultaneously with, and for the same total length of time as, the particulate sample run.

8.2.2 Select a nozzle size based on the range of velocity heads, such that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to maintain isokinetic sampling rates. During the run, do not change the nozzle size. Ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is chosen for the range of velocity heads encountered (see Section 8.3 of Method 2).

8.2.3 Select a suitable probe liner and probe length such that all traverse points can be sampled. For large stacks, consider sampling from opposite sides of the stack to reduce the required probe length.

8.2.4 Select a total sampling time greater than or equal to the minimum total sampling time specified in the test procedures for the specific industry such that (l) the sampling time per point is not less than 2 minutes (or some greater time interval as specified by the Administrator), and (2) the sample volume taken (corrected to standard conditions) will exceed the required minimum total gas sample volume. The latter is based on an approximate average sampling rate.

8.2.5 The sampling time at each point shall be the same. It is recommended that the number of minutes sampled at each point be an integer or an integer plus one-half minute, in order to avoid timekeeping errors.

8.2.6 In some circumstances (e.g., batch cycles) it may be necessary to sample for shorter times at the traverse points and to obtain smaller gas sample volumes. In these cases, the Administrator's approval must first be obtained.

8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train.

8.3.1 During preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep all openings where contamination can occur covered until just prior to assembly or until sampling is about to begin. Place 100 ml of water in each of the first two impingers, leave the third impinger empty, and transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of preweighed silica gel from its container to the fourth impinger. More silica gel may be used, but care should be taken to ensure that it is not entrained and carried out from the impinger during sampling. Place the container in a clean place for later use in the sample recovery. Alternatively, the weight of the silica gel plus impinger may be determined to the nearest 0.5 g and recorded.

8.3.2 Using a tweezer or clean disposable surgical gloves, place a labeled (identified) and weighed filter in the filter holder. Be sure that the filter is properly centered and the gasket properly placed so as to prevent the sample gas stream from circumventing the filter. Check the filter for tears after assembly is completed.

8.3.3 When glass probe liners are used, install the selected nozzle using a Viton A O-ring when stack temperatures are less than 260 °C (500 °F) or a heat-resistant string gasket when temperatures are higher. See APTD-0576 for details. Other connecting systems using either 316 stainless steel or Teflon ferrules may be used. When metal liners are used, install the nozzle as discussed above or by a leak-free direct mechanical connection. Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point.

8.3.4 Set up the train as shown in Figure 5-1, using (if necessary) a very light coat of silicone grease on all ground glass joints, greasing only the outer portion (see APTD-0576) to avoid the possibility of contamination by the silicone grease. Subject to the approval of the Administrator, a glass cyclone may be used between the probe and filter holder when the total particulate catch is expected to exceed 100 mg or when water droplets are present in the stack gas.

8.3.5 Place crushed ice around the impingers.

8.4 Leak-Check Procedures.

8.4.1 Leak Check of Metering System Shown in Figure 5-1. That portion of the sampling train from the pump to the orifice meter should be leak-checked prior to initial use and after each shipment. Leakage after the pump will result in less volume being recorded than is actually sampled. The following procedure is suggested (see Figure 5-2): Close the main valve on the meter box. Insert a one-hole rubber stopper with rubber tubing attached into the orifice exhaust pipe. Disconnect and vent the low side of the orifice manometer. Close off the low side orifice tap. Pressurize the system to 13 to 18 cm (5 to 7 in.) water column by blowing into the rubber tubing. Pinch off the tubing, and observe the manometer for one minute. A loss of pressure on the manometer indicates a leak in the meter box; leaks, if present, must be corrected.

8.4.2 Pretest Leak Check. A pretest leak check of the sampling train is recommended, but not required. If the pretest leak check is conducted, the following procedure should be used.

8.4.2.1 After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and set the filter and probe heating systems to the desired operating temperatures. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. If a Viton A O-ring or other leak-free connection is used in assembling the probe nozzle to the probe liner, leak-check the train at the sampling site by plugging the nozzle and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum.

Note:

A lower vacuum may be used, provided that it is not exceeded during the test.

8.4.2.2 If a heat-resistant string is used, do not connect the probe to the train during the leak check. Instead, leak-check the train by first plugging the inlet to the filter holder (cyclone, if applicable) and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum (see Note in Section 8.4.2.1). Then connect the probe to the train, and leak-check at approximately 25 mm (1 in.) Hg vacuum; alternatively, the probe may be leak-checked with the rest of the sampling train, in one step, at 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. Leakage rates in excess of 4 percent of the average sampling rate or 0.00057 m³/min (0.020 cfm), whichever is less, are unacceptable.

8.4.2.3 The following leak-check instructions for the sampling train described in APTD-0576 and APTD-0581 may be helpful. Start the pump with the bypass valve fully open and the coarse adjust valve completely closed. Partially open the coarse adjust valve, and slowly close the bypass valve until the desired vacuum is reached. Do not reverse the direction of the bypass valve, as this will cause water to back up into the filter holder. If the desired vacuum is exceeded, either leak-check at this higher vacuum, or end the leak check and start over.

8.4.2.4 When the leak check is completed, first slowly remove the plug from the inlet to the probe, filter holder, or cyclone (if applicable), and immediately turn off the vacuum pump. This prevents the water in the impingers from being forced backward into the filter holder and the silica gel from being entrained backward into the third impinger.

8.4.3 Leak Checks During Sample Run. If, during the sampling run, a component (e.g., filter assembly or impinger) change becomes necessary, a leak check shall be conducted immediately before the change is made. The leak check shall be done according to the procedure outlined in Section 8.4.2 above, except that it shall be done at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value recorded up to that point in the test. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m³/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable, and no correction will need to be applied to the total volume of dry gas metered; if, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either record the leakage rate and plan to correct the sample volume as shown in Section 12.3 of this method, or void the sample run.

Note:

Immediately after component changes, leak checks are optional. If such leak checks are done, the procedure outlined in Section 8.4.2 above should be used.

8.4.4 Post-Test Leak Check. A leak check of the sampling train is mandatory at the conclusion of each sampling run. The leak check shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in Section 8.4.2, except that it shall be conducted at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value reached during the sampling run. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m³ min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable, and no correction need be applied to the total volume of dry gas metered. If, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either record the leakage rate and correct the sample volume as shown in Section 12.3 of this method, or void the sampling run.

8.5 Sampling Train Operation. During the sampling run, maintain an isokinetic sampling rate (within 10 percent of true isokinetic unless otherwise specified by the Administrator) and a temperature around the filter of 120 ± 14 °C (248 ± 25 °F), or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator.

8.5.1 For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-3. Be sure to record the initial DGM reading. Record the DGM readings at the beginning and end of each sampling time increment, when changes in flow rates are made, before and after each leak check, and when sampling is halted. Take other readings indicated by Figure 5-3 at least once at each sample point during each time increment and additional readings when significant changes (20 percent variation in velocity head readings) necessitate additional adjustments in flow rate. Level and zero the manometer. Because the manometer level and zero may drift due to vibrations and temperature changes, make periodic checks during the traverse.

8.5.2 Clean the portholes prior to the test run to minimize the chance of collecting deposited material. To begin sampling, verify that the filter and probe heating systems are up to temperature, remove the nozzle cap, verify that the pitot tube and probe are properly positioned. Position the nozzle at the first traverse point with the tip pointing directly into the gas stream. Immediately start the pump, and adjust the flow to isokinetic conditions. Nomographs are available which aid in the rapid adjustment of the isokinetic sampling rate without excessive computations. These nomographs are designed for use when the Type S pitot tube coefficient (C_p) is 0.85 ± 0.02, and the stack gas equivalent density [dry molecular weight (M_d)] is equal to 29 ± 4. APTD-0576 details the procedure for using the nomographs. If C_p and M_d are outside the above stated ranges, do not use the nomographs unless appropriate steps (see Reference 7 in Section 17.0) are taken to compensate for the deviations.

8.5.3 When the stack is under significant negative pressure (i.e., height of impinger stem), take care to close the coarse adjust valve before inserting the probe into the stack to prevent water from backing into the filter holder. If necessary, the pump may be turned on with the coarse adjust valve closed.

8.5.4 When the probe is in position, block off the openings around the probe and porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of the gas stream.

8.5.5 Traverse the stack cross-section, as required by Method 1 or as specified by the Administrator, being careful not to bump the probe nozzle into the stack walls when sampling near the walls or when removing or inserting the probe through the portholes; this minimizes the chance of extracting deposited material.

8.5.6 During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the temperature around the filter holder at the proper level; add more ice and, if necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the condenser/silica gel outlet. Also, periodically check the level and zero of the manometer.

8.5.7 If the pressure drop across the filter becomes too high, making isokinetic sampling difficult to maintain, the filter may be replaced in the midst of the sample run. It is recommended that another complete filter assembly be used rather than attempting to change the filter itself. Before a new filter assembly is installed, conduct a leak check (see Section 8.4.3). The total PM weight shall include the summation of the filter assembly catches.

8.5.8 A single train shall be used for the entire sample run, except in cases where simultaneous sampling is required in two or more separate ducts or at two or more different locations within the same duct, or in cases where equipment failure necessitates a change of trains. In all other situations, the use of two or more trains will be subject to the approval of the Administrator.

Note:

When two or more trains are used, separate analyses of the front-half and (if applicable) impinger catches from each train shall be performed, unless identical nozzle sizes were used on all trains, in which case, the front-half catches from the individual trains may be combined (as may the impinger catches) and one analysis of front-half catch and one analysis of impinger catch may be performed. Consult with the Administrator for details concerning the calculation of results when two or more trains are used.

8.5.9 At the end of the sample run, close the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, record the final DGM meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak check, as outlined in Section 8.4.4. Also, leak-check the pitot lines as described in Method 2, Section 8.1. The lines must pass this leak check, in order to validate the velocity head data.

8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Calculate percent isokinetic (see Calculations, Section 12.11) to determine whether the run was valid or another test run should be made. If there was difficulty in maintaining isokinetic rates because of source conditions, consult with the Administrator for possible variance on the isokinetic rates.

8.7 Sample Recovery.

8.7.1 Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the probe to cool.

8.7.2 When the probe can be safely handled, wipe off all external PM near the tip of the probe nozzle, and place a cap over it to prevent losing or gaining PM. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is cooling down. This would create a vacuum in the filter holder, thereby drawing water from the impingers into the filter holder.

8.7.3 Before moving the sample train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the sample train, wipe off the silicone grease, and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Wipe off the silicone grease from the filter inlet where the probe was fastened, and cap it. Remove the umbilical cord from the last impinger, and cap the impinger. If a flexible line is used between the first impinger or condenser and the filter holder, disconnect the line at the filter holder, and let any condensed water or liquid drain into the impingers or condenser. After wiping off the silicone grease, cap off the filter holder outlet and impinger inlet. Either ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps may be used to close these openings.

8.7.4 Transfer the probe and filter-impinger assembly to the cleanup area. This area should be clean and protected from the wind so that the chances of contaminating or losing the sample will be minimized.

8.7.5 Save a portion of the acetone used for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this acetone directly from the wash bottle being used, and place it in a glass sample container labeled “acetone blank.”

8.7.6 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly, and note any abnormal conditions. Treat the samples as follows:

8.7.6.1 Container No. 1. Carefully remove the filter from the filter holder, and place it in its identified petri dish container. Use a pair of tweezers and/or clean disposable surgical gloves to handle the filter. If it is necessary to fold the filter, do so such that the PM cake is inside the fold. Using a dry Nylon bristle brush and/or a sharp-edged blade, carefully transfer to the petri dish any PM and/or filter fibers that adhere to the filter holder gasket. Seal the container.

8.7.6.2 Container No. 2. Taking care to see that dust on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover PM or any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, and front half of the filter holder by washing these components with acetone and placing the wash in a glass container. Deionized distilled water may be used instead of acetone when approved by the Administrator and shall be used when specified by the Administrator. In these cases, save a water blank, and follow the Administrator's directions on analysis. Perform the acetone rinse as follows:

8.7.6.2.1 Carefully remove the probe nozzle. Clean the inside surface by rinsing with acetone from a wash bottle and brushing with a Nylon bristle brush. Brush until the acetone rinse shows no visible particles, after which make a final rinse of the inside surface with acetone.

8.7.6.2.2 Brush and rinse the inside parts of the fitting with acetone in a similar way until no visible particles remain.

8.7.6.2.3 Rinse the probe liner with acetone by tilting and rotating the probe while squirting acetone into its upper end so that all inside surfaces will be wetted with acetone. Let the acetone drain from the lower end into the sample container. A funnel (glass or polyethylene) may be used to aid in transferring liquid washes to the container. Follow the acetone rinse with a probe brush. Hold the probe in an inclined position, squirt acetone into the upper end as the probe brush is being pushed with a twisting action through the probe; hold a sample container underneath the lower end of the probe, and catch any acetone and particulate matter that is brushed from the probe. Run the brush through the probe three times or more until no visible PM is carried out with the acetone or until none remains in the probe liner on visual inspection. With stainless steel or other metal probes, run the brush through in the above prescribed manner at least six times since metal probes have small crevices in which particulate matter can be entrapped. Rinse the brush with acetone, and quantitatively collect these washings in the sample container. After the brushing, make a final acetone rinse of the probe.

8.7.6.2.4 It is recommended that two people clean the probe to minimize sample losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and protected from contamination.

8.7.6.2.5 After ensuring that all joints have been wiped clean of silicone grease, clean the inside of the front half of the filter holder by rubbing the surfaces with a Nylon bristle brush and rinsing with acetone. Rinse each surface three times or more if needed to remove visible particulate. Make a final rinse of the brush and filter holder. Carefully rinse out the glass cyclone, also (if applicable). After all acetone washings and particulate matter have been collected in the sample container, tighten the lid on the sample container so that acetone will not leak out when it is shipped to the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid level to allow determination of whether leakage occurred during transport. Label the container to identify clearly its contents.

8.7.6.3 Container No. 3. Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine whether it has been completely spent, and make a notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from the fourth impinger to its original container, and seal. A funnel may make it easier to pour the silica gel without spilling. A rubber policeman may be used as an aid in removing the silica gel from the impinger. It is not necessary to remove the small amount of dust particles that may adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult to remove. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture calculations, do not use any water or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is available in the field, follow the procedure for Container No. 3 in Section 11.2.3.

8.7.6.4 Impinger Water. Treat the impingers as follows: Make a notation of any color or film in the liquid catch. Measure the liquid that is in the first three impingers to within 1 ml by using a graduated cylinder or by weighing it to within 0.5 g by using a balance. Record the volume or weight of liquid present. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the effluent gas. Discard the liquid after measuring and recording the volume or weight, unless analysis of the impinger catch is required (see NOTE, Section 6.1.1.8). If a different type of condenser is used, measure the amount of moisture condensed either volumetrically or gravimetrically.

8.8 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.

9.0 Quality Control

9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.

9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. The following procedures are suggested to check the volume metering system calibration values at the field test site prior to sample collection. These procedures are optional.

9.2.1 Meter Orifice Check. Using the calibration data obtained during the calibration procedure described in Section 10.3, determine the ΔH@ for the metering system orifice. The ΔH@ is the orifice pressure differential in units of in. H₂ O that correlates to 0.75 cfm of air at 528 °R and 29.92 in. Hg. The ΔH@ is calculated as follows:

Where:

ΔH = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter, in. H₂ O.

T_m = Absolute average DGM temperature, °R.

P_bar = Barometric pressure, in. Hg.

θ = Total sampling time, min.

Y = DGM calibration factor, dimensionless.

V_m = Volume of gas sample as measured by DGM, dcf.

0.0319 = (0.0567 in. Hg/°R) (0.75 cfm)²

9.2.1.1 Before beginning the field test (a set of three runs usually constitutes a field test), operate the metering system (i.e., pump, volume meter, and orifice) at the ΔH@ pressure differential for 10 minutes. Record the volume collected, the DGM temperature, and the barometric pressure. Calculate a DGM calibration check value, Y_c, as follows:

where:

Y_c = DGM calibration check value, dimensionless.

10 = Run time, min.

9.2.1.2 Compare the Y_c value with the dry gas meter calibration factor Y to determine that: 0.97Y < Y_c < 1.03Y. If the Y_c value is not within this range, the volume metering system should be investigated before beginning the test.

9.2.2 Calibrated Critical Orifice. A critical orifice, calibrated against a wet test meter or spirometer and designed to be inserted at the inlet of the sampling meter box, may be used as a check by following the procedure of Section 16.2.

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

Note:

Maintain a laboratory log of all calibrations.

10.1 Probe Nozzle. Probe nozzles shall be calibrated before their initial use in the field. Using a micrometer, measure the ID of the nozzle to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.). Make three separate measurements using different diameters each time, and obtain the average of the measurements. The difference between the high and low numbers shall not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). When nozzles become nicked, dented, or corroded, they shall be reshaped, sharpened, and recalibrated before use. Each nozzle shall be permanently and uniquely identified.

10.2 Pitot Tube Assembly. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in Section 10.1 of Method 2.

10.3 Metering System.

10.3.1 Calibration Prior to Use. Before its initial use in the field, the metering system shall be calibrated as follows: Connect the metering system inlet to the outlet of a wet test meter that is accurate to within 1 percent. Refer to Figure 5-4. The wet test meter should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft³/rev). A spirometer of 400 liters (14 ft³) or more capacity, or equivalent, may be used for this calibration, although a wet test meter is usually more practical. The wet test meter should be periodically calibrated with a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to ensure the accuracy of the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet test meters of other sizes may be used, provided that the specified accuracies of the procedure are maintained. Run the metering system pump for about 15 minutes with the orifice manometer indicating a median reading as expected in field use to allow the pump to warm up and to permit the interior surface of the wet test meter to be thoroughly wetted. Then, at each of a minimum of three orifice manometer settings, pass an exact quantity of gas through the wet test meter and note the gas volume indicated by the DGM. Also note the barometric pressure and the temperatures of the wet test meter, the inlet of the DGM, and the outlet of the DGM. Select the highest and lowest orifice settings to bracket the expected field operating range of the orifice. Use a minimum volume of 0.14 m³ (5 ft³) at all orifice settings. Record all the data on a form similar to Figure 5-5 and calculate Y, the DGM calibration factor, and ΔH_@, the orifice calibration factor, at each orifice setting as shown on Figure 5-5. Allowable tolerances for individual Y and ΔH_@ values are given in Figure 5-5. Use the average of the Y values in the calculations in Section 12.0.

10.3.1.1 Before calibrating the metering system, it is suggested that a leak check be conducted. For metering systems having diaphragm pumps, the normal leak-check procedure will not detect leakages within the pump. For these cases the following leak-check procedure is suggested: make a 10-minute calibration run at 0.00057 m³/min (0.020 cfm). At the end of the run, take the difference of the measured wet test meter and DGM volumes. Divide the difference by 10 to get the leak rate. The leak rate should not exceed 0.00057 m³/min (0.020 cfm).

10.3.2 Calibration After Use. After each field use, the calibration of the metering system shall be checked by performing three calibration runs at a single, intermediate orifice setting (based on the previous field test), with the vacuum set at the maximum value reached during the test series. To adjust the vacuum, insert a valve between the wet test meter and the inlet of the metering system. Calculate the average value of the DGM calibration factor. If the value has changed by more than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter over the full range of orifice settings, as detailed in Section 10.3.1.

Note:

Alternative procedures (e.g., rechecking the orifice meter coefficient) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

10.3.3 Acceptable Variation in Calibration. If the DGM coefficient values obtained before and after a test series differ by more than 5 percent, the test series shall either be voided, or calculations for the test series shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient value (i.e., before or after) gives the lower value of total sample volume.

10.4 Probe Heater Calibration. Use a heat source to generate air heated to selected temperatures that approximate those expected to occur in the sources to be sampled. Pass this air through the probe at a typical sample flow rate while measuring the probe inlet and outlet temperatures at various probe heater settings. For each air temperature generated, construct a graph of probe heating system setting versus probe outlet temperature. The procedure outlined in APTD-0576 can also be used. Probes constructed according to APTD-0581 need not be calibrated if the calibration curves in APTD-0576 are used. Also, probes with outlet temperature monitoring capabilities do not require calibration.

Note:

The probe heating system shall be calibrated before its initial use in the field.

10.5 Temperature Sensors. Use the procedure in Section 10.3 of Method 2 to calibrate in-stack temperature sensors. Dial thermometers, such as are used for the DGM and condenser outlet, shall be calibrated against mercury-in-glass thermometers.

10.6 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-6.

11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:

11.2.1 Container No. 1. Leave the contents in the shipping container or transfer the filter and any loose PM from the sample container to a tared glass weighing dish. Desiccate for 24 hours in a desiccator containing anhydrous calcium sulfate. Weigh to a constant weight, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. For the purposes of this section, the term “constant weight” means a difference of no more than 0.5 mg or 1 percent of total weight less tare weight, whichever is greater, between two consecutive weighings, with no less than 6 hours of desiccation time between weighings. Alternatively, the sample may be oven dried at 104 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, cooled in the desiccator, and weighed to a constant weight, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator. The sample may be oven dried at 104 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours. Once the sample has cooled, weigh the sample, and use this weight as a final weight.

11.2.2 Container No. 2. Note the level of liquid in the container, and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetrically to ±0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.

11.2.3 Container No. 3. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. This step may be conducted in the field.

11.2.4 Acetone Blank Container. Measure the acetone in this container either volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer the acetone to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.

Note:

The contents of Container No. 2 as well as the acetone blank container may be evaporated at temperatures higher than ambient. If evaporation is done at an elevated temperature, the temperature must be below the boiling point of the solvent; also, to prevent “bumping,” the evaporation process must be closely supervised, and the contents of the beaker must be swirled occasionally to maintain an even temperature. Use extreme care, as acetone is highly flammable and has a low flash point.

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used, provided that they give equivalent results.

12.1 Nomenclature.

A_n = Cross-sectional area of nozzle, m² (ft²).

B_ws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.

C_a = Acetone blank residue concentration, mg/mg.

c_s = Concentration of particulate matter in stack gas, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).

I = Percent of isokinetic sampling.

L₁ = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check conducted prior to the first component change, m³/min (ft³/min)

L_a = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a pretest leak-check or for a leak-check following a component change; equal to 0.00057 m³/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate, whichever is less.

L_i = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check conducted prior to the “i^th” component change (i = 1, 2, 3 . . . n), m³/min (cfm).

L_p = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak-check, m³/min (cfm).

m_a = Mass of residue of acetone after evaporation, mg.

m_n = Total amount of particulate matter collected, mg.

M_w = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-mole).

P_bar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in. Hg).

P_s = Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).

P_std = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).

R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 ((mm Hg)(m ³))/((K)(g-mole)) {21.85 ((in. Hg) (ft ³))/((°R) (lb-mole))}.

T_m = Absolute average DGM temperature (see Figure 5-3), K (°R).

T_s = Absolute average stack gas temperature (see Figure 5-3), K (°R).

T_std = Standard absolute temperature, 293 K (528 °R).

V_a = Volume of acetone blank, ml.

V_aw = Volume of acetone used in wash, ml.

V_1c = Total volume of liquid collected in impingers and silica gel (see Figure 5-6), ml.

V_m = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).

V_m(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).

V_w(std) = Volume of water vapor in the gas sample, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).

V_s = Stack gas velocity, calculated by Method 2, Equation 2-7, using data obtained from Method 5, m/sec (ft/sec).

W_a = Weight of residue in acetone wash, mg.

Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.

ΔH = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter (see Figure 5-4), mm H₂ O (in. H₂ O).

ρ_a = Density of acetone, mg/ml (see label on bottle).

ρ_w = Density of water, 0.9982 g/ml.(0.002201 lb/ml).

θ = Total sampling time, min.

θ₁ = Sampling time interval, from the beginning of a run until the first component change, min.

θ_i = Sampling time interval, between two successive component changes, beginning with the interval between the first and second changes, min.

θ_p = Sampling time interval, from the final (n ^th) component change until the end of the sampling run, min.

13.6  = Specific gravity of mercury.

60 = Sec/min.

100 = Conversion to percent.

12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data sheet (Figure 5-3).

12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Correct the sample volume measured by the dry gas meter to standard conditions (20 °C, 760 mm Hg or 68 °F, 29.92 in. Hg) by using Equation 5-1.

Where:

K₁ = 0.3858 °K/mm Hg for metric units, = 17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.

Note:

Equation 5-1 can be used as written unless the leakage rate observed during any of the mandatory leak checks (i.e., the post-test leak check or leak checks conducted prior to component changes) exceeds L_a. If L_p or L_i exceeds L_a, Equation 5-1 must be modified as follows:

(a) Case I. No component changes made during sampling run. In this case, replace V_m in Equation 5-1 with the expression:

(b) Case II. One or more component changes made during the sampling run. In this case, replace V_m in Equation 5-1 by the expression:

and substitute only for those leakage rates (L_i or L_p) which exceed L_a.

12.4 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed.

Where:

K₂ = 0.001333 m ³/ml for metric units, = 0.04706 ft ³/ml for English units.

12.5 Moisture Content.

Note:

In saturated or water droplet-laden gas streams, two calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made, one from the impinger analysis (Equation 5-3), and a second from the assumption of saturated conditions. The lower of the two values of B_ws shall be considered correct. The procedure for determining the moisture content based upon the assumption of saturated conditions is given in Section 4.0 of Method 4. For the purposes of this method, the average stack gas temperature from Figure 5-3 may be used to make this determination, provided that the accuracy of the in-stack temperature sensor is ± 1°C (2°F).

12.6 Acetone Blank Concentration.

12.7 Acetone Wash Blank.

12.8 Total Particulate Weight. Determine the total particulate matter catch from the sum of the weights obtained from Containers 1 and 2 less the acetone blank (see Figure 5-6).

Note:

In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of acetone used be subtracted from the sample weight. Refer to Section 8.5.8 to assist in calculation of results involving two or more filter assemblies or two or more sampling trains.

12.9 Particulate Concentration.

Image Not Available

Where:

K₃ = 0.001 g/mg for metric units.

= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.

12.10 Conversion Factors:

12.11 Isokinetic Variation.

12.11.1 Calculation from Raw Data.

Where:

K₄ = 0.003454 ((mm Hg)(m³))/((ml)(°K)) for metric units,

= 0.002669 ((in. Hg)(ft³))/((ml)(°R)) for English units.

12.11.2 Calculation from Intermediate Values.

Where:

K₅ = 4.320 for metric units,

= 0.09450 for English units.

12.11.3 Acceptable Results. If 90 percent ≤ I ≤ 110 percent, the results are acceptable. If the PM results are low in comparison to the standard, and “I” is over 110 percent or less than 90 percent, the Administrator may opt to accept the results. Reference 4 in Section 17.0 may be used to make acceptability judgments. If “I” is judged to be unacceptable, reject the results, and repeat the sampling run.

12.12 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, using data obtained in this method and the equations in Sections 12.3 and 12.4 of Method 2.

13.0 Method Performance. [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention. [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management. [Reserved]

16.0 Alternative Procedures

16.1 Dry Gas Meter as a Calibration Standard. A DGM may be used as a calibration standard for volume measurements in place of the wet test meter specified in Section 10.3, provided that it is calibrated initially and recalibrated periodically as follows:

16.1.1 Standard Dry Gas Meter Calibration.

16.1.1.1. The DGM to be calibrated and used as a secondary reference meter should be of high quality and have an appropriately sized capacity (e.g., 3 liters/rev (0.1 ft³/rev)). A spirometer (400 liters (14 ft³) or more capacity), or equivalent, may be used for this calibration, although a wet test meter is usually more practical. The wet test meter should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft³/rev) and capable of measuring volume to within 1.0 percent. Wet test meters should be checked against a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to ensure the accuracy of the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet test meters of other sizes may be used, provided that the specified accuracies of the procedure are maintained.

16.1.1.2 Set up the components as shown in Figure 5-7. A spirometer, or equivalent, may be used in place of the wet test meter in the system. Run the pump for at least 5 minutes at a flow rate of about 10 liters/min (0.35 cfm) to condition the interior surface of the wet test meter. The pressure drop indicated by the manometer at the inlet side of the DGM should be minimized (no greater than 100 mm H₂ O (4 in. H₂ O) at a flow rate of 30 liters/min (1 cfm)). This can be accomplished by using large diameter tubing connections and straight pipe fittings.

16.1.1.3 Collect the data as shown in the example data sheet (see Figure 5-8). Make triplicate runs at each of the flow rates and at no less than five different flow rates. The range of flow rates should be between 10 and 34 liters/min (0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or over the expected operating range.

16.1.1.4 Calculate flow rate, Q, for each run using the wet test meter volume, V_W, and the run time, θ. Calculate the DGM coefficient, Y_ds, for each run. These calculations are as follows:

Where:

K₁ = 0.3858 °C/mm Hg for metric units=17.64 °F/in. Hg for English units.

V_W = Wet test meter volume, liter (ft³).

V_ds = Dry gas meter volume, liter (ft³).

T_ds = Average dry gas meter temperature, °C (°F).

T_adj = 273 °C for metric units = 460 °F for English units.

T_W = Average wet test meter temperature, °C (°F)

P_bar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).

Δp = Dry gas meter inlet differential pressure, mm H₂ O (in. H₂ O).

θ = Run time, min.

16.1.1.5 Compare the three Y_ds values at each of the flow rates and determine the maximum and minimum values. The difference between the maximum and minimum values at each flow rate should be no greater than 0.030. Extra sets of triplicate runs may be made in order to complete this requirement. In addition, the meter coefficients should be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications cannot be met in three sets of successive triplicate runs, the meter is not suitable as a calibration standard and should not be used as such. If these specifications are met, average the three Y_ds values at each flow rate resulting in no less than five average meter coefficients, Y_ds.

16.1.1.6 Prepare a curve of meter coefficient, Y_ds, versus flow rate, Q, for the DGM. This curve shall be used as a reference when the meter is used to calibrate other DGMs and to determine whether recalibration is required.

16.1.2 Standard Dry Gas Meter Recalibration.

16.1.2.1 Recalibrate the standard DGM against a wet test meter or spirometer annually or after every 200 hours of operation, whichever comes first. This requirement is valid provided the standard DGM is kept in a laboratory and, if transported, cared for as any other laboratory instrument. Abuse to the standard meter may cause a change in the calibration and will require more frequent recalibrations.

16.1.2.2 As an alternative to full recalibration, a two-point calibration check may be made. Follow the same procedure and equipment arrangement as for a full recalibration, but run the meter at only two flow rates [suggested rates are 14 and 30 liters/min (0.5 and 1.0 cfm)]. Calculate the meter coefficients for these two points, and compare the values with the meter calibration curve. If the two coefficients are within 1.5 percent of the calibration curve values at the same flow rates, the meter need not be recalibrated until the next date for a recalibration check.

16.2 Critical Orifices As Calibration Standards. Critical orifices may be used as calibration standards in place of the wet test meter specified in Section 16.1, provided that they are selected, calibrated, and used as follows:

16.2.1 Selection of Critical Orifices.

16.2.1.1 The procedure that follows describes the use of hypodermic needles or stainless steel needle tubings which have been found suitable for use as critical orifices. Other materials and critical orifice designs may be used provided the orifices act as true critical orifices (i.e., a critical vacuum can be obtained, as described in Section 16.2.2.2.3). Select five critical orifices that are appropriately sized to cover the range of flow rates between 10 and 34 liters/min (0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or the expected operating range. Two of the critical orifices should bracket the expected operating range. A minimum of three critical orifices will be needed to calibrate a Method 5 DGM; the other two critical orifices can serve as spares and provide better selection for bracketing the range of operating flow rates. The needle sizes and tubing lengths shown in Table 5-1 in Section 18.0 give the approximate flow rates.

16.2.1.2 These needles can be adapted to a Method 5 type sampling train as follows: Insert a serum bottle stopper, 13 by 20 mm sleeve type, into a 1/2-inch Swagelok (or equivalent) quick connect. Insert the needle into the stopper as shown in Figure 5-9.

16.2.2 Critical Orifice Calibration. The procedure described in this section uses the Method 5 meter box configuration with a DGM as described in Section 6.1.1.9 to calibrate the critical orifices. Other schemes may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.

16.2.2.1 Calibration of Meter Box. The critical orifices must be calibrated in the same configuration as they will be used (i.e., there should be no connections to the inlet of the orifice).

16.2.2.1.1 Before calibrating the meter box, leak check the system as follows: Fully open the coarse adjust valve, and completely close the by-pass valve. Plug the inlet. Then turn on the pump, and determine whether there is any leakage. The leakage rate shall be zero (i.e., no detectable movement of the DGM dial shall be seen for 1 minute).

16.2.2.1.2 Check also for leakages in that portion of the sampling train between the pump and the orifice meter. See Section 8.4.1 for the procedure; make any corrections, if necessary. If leakage is detected, check for cracked gaskets, loose fittings, worn O-rings, etc., and make the necessary repairs.

16.2.2.1.3 After determining that the meter box is leakless, calibrate the meter box according to the procedure given in Section 10.3. Make sure that the wet test meter meets the requirements stated in Section 16.1.1.1. Check the water level in the wet test meter. Record the DGM calibration factor, Y.

16.2.2.2 Calibration of Critical Orifices. Set up the apparatus as shown in Figure 5-10.

16.2.2.2.1 Allow a warm-up time of 15 minutes. This step is important to equilibrate the temperature conditions through the DGM.

16.2.2.2.2 Leak check the system as in Section 16.2.2.1.1. The leakage rate shall be zero.

16.2.2.2.3 Before calibrating the critical orifice, determine its suitability and the appropriate operating vacuum as follows: Turn on the pump, fully open the coarse adjust valve, and adjust the by-pass valve to give a vacuum reading corresponding to about half of atmospheric pressure. Observe the meter box orifice manometer reading, ΔH. Slowly increase the vacuum reading until a stable reading is obtained on the meter box orifice manometer. Record the critical vacuum for each orifice. Orifices that do not reach a critical value shall not be used.

16.2.2.2.4 Obtain the barometric pressure using a barometer as described in Section 6.1.2. Record the barometric pressure, P_bar, in mm Hg (in. Hg).

16.2.2.2.5 Conduct duplicate runs at a vacuum of 25 to 50 mm Hg (1 to 2 in. Hg) above the critical vacuum. The runs shall be at least 5 minutes each. The DGM volume readings shall be in increments of complete revolutions of the DGM. As a guideline, the times should not differ by more than 3.0 seconds (this includes allowance for changes in the DGM temperatures) to achieve ± 0.5 percent in K′ (see Eq. 5-11). Record the information listed in Figure 5-11.

16.2.2.2.6 Calculate K′ using Equation 5-11.

Where:

K′ = Critical orifice coefficient,

[m ³)(°K)1/2]/

[(mm Hg)(min)] {[(ft ³)(°R)1/2)] [(in. Hg)(min)].

T_amb = Absolute ambient temperature, °K (°R).

Calculate the arithmetic mean of the K′ values. The individual K' values should not differ by more than ±0.5 percent from the mean value.

16.2.3 Using the Critical Orifices as Calibration Standards.

16.2.3.1 Record the barometric pressure.

16.2.3.2 Calibrate the metering system according to the procedure outlined in Section 16.2.2. Record the information listed in Figure 5-12.

16.2.3.3 Calculate the standard volumes of air passed through the DGM and the critical orifices, and calculate the DGM calibration factor, Y, using the equations below:

Image Not Available

Where:

V_cr(std) = Volume of gas sample passed through the critical orifice, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).

K₁ = 0.3858 K/mm Hg for metric units

= 17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.

16.2.3.4 Average the DGM calibration values for each of the flow rates. The calibration factor, Y, at each of the flow rates should not differ by more than ± 2 percent from the average.

16.2.3.5 To determine the need for recalibrating the critical orifices, compare the DGM Y factors obtained from two adjacent orifices each time a DGM is calibrated; for example, when checking orifice 13/2.5, use orifices 12/10.2 and 13/5.1. If any critical orifice yields a DGM Y factor differing by more than 2 percent from the others, recalibrate the critical orifice according to Section 16.2.2.

17.0 References.

1. Addendum to Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. December 6, 1967.

2. Martin, Robert M. Construction Details of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0581. April 1971.

3. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0576. March 1972.

4. Smith, W.S., R.T. Shigehara, and W.F. Todd. A Method of Interpreting Stack Sampling Data. Paper Presented at the 63rd Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, MO. June 14-19, 1970.

5. Smith, W.S., et al. Stack Gas Sampling Improved and Simplified With New Equipment. APCA Paper No. 67-119. 1967.

6. Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. 1967.

7. Shigehara, R.T. Adjustment in the EPA Nomograph for Different Pitot Tube Coefficients and Dry Molecular Weights. Stack Sampling News 2:4-11. October 1974.

8. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially Available Instrumentation for the Measurement of Low-Range Gas Velocities. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch. Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976 (unpublished paper).

9. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 26. Gaseous Fuels; Coal and Coke; Atmospheric Analysis. American Society for Testing and Materials. Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp. 617-622.

10. Felix, L.G., G.I. Clinard, G.E. Lacy, and J.D. McCain. Inertial Cascade Impactor Substrate Media for Flue Gas Sampling. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. Publication No. EPA-600/7-77-060. June 1977. 83 pp.

11. Westlin, P.R. and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 3 (1):17-30. February 1978.

12. Lodge, J.P., Jr., J.B. Pate, B.E. Ammons, and G.A. Swanson. The Use of Hypodermic Needles as Critical Orifices in Air Sampling. J. Air Pollution Control Association. 16:197-200. 1966.

18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Plant

Date

Run No.

Filter No.

Amount liquid lost during transport

Acetone blank volume, m1

Acetone blank concentration, mg/mg (Equation 5-4)

Acetone wash blank, mg (Equation 5-5)

Figure 5-6. Analytical Data Sheet

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Image Not Available

Date

Train ID

DGM cal. factor

Critical orifice ID

Figure 5-11. Data sheet of determining K′ factor.

Date

Train ID

Critical orifice ID

Critical orifice K' factor

Figure 5-12. Data Sheet for Determining DGM Y Factor

Method 5A—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From the Asphalt Processing and Asphalt Roofing Industry

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, and Method 5.

1.0 Scope and Applications

1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.

1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from asphalt roofing industry process saturators, blowing stills, and other sources as specified in the regulations.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 42 ± 10 °C (108 ± 18 °F). The PM mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1, with the following exceptions and additions:

6.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, Section 6.1.1.2, with the note that at high stack gas temperatures greater than 250 °C (480 °F), water-cooled probes may be required to control the probe exit temperature to 42 ± 10 °C (108 ± 18 °F).

6.1.2 Precollector Cyclone. Borosilicate glass following the construction details shown in Air Pollution Technical Document (APTD)-0581, “Construction Details of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment” (Reference 2 in Method 5, Section 17.0).

Note:

The cyclone shall be used when the stack gas moisture is greater than 10 percent, and shall not be used otherwise.

6.1.3 Filter Heating System. Any heating (or cooling) system capable of maintaining a sample gas temperature at the exit end of the filter holder during sampling at 42 ± 10 °C (108 ± 18 °F).

6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery:

6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes, Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, and Funnel and Rubber Policeman. Same as in Method 5, Sections 6.2.1, 6.2.5, 6.2.6, and 6.2.7, respectively.

6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Glass.

6.2.3 Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant 500-ml or 1,000-ml borosilicate glass bottles, with rubber-backed Teflon screw cap liners or caps that are constructed so as to be leak-free, and resistant to chemical attack by 1,1,1-trichloroethane (TCE). (Narrow-mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone to leakage.)

6.2.4 Petri Dishes. Glass, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.

6.2.5 Funnel. Glass.

6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, Section 6.3, with the following additions:

6.3.1 Beakers. Glass, 250-ml and 500-ml.

6.3.2 Separatory Funnel. 100-ml or greater.

7.0. Reagents and Standards

7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:

7.1.1 Filters, Silica Gel, Water, and Crushed Ice. Same as in Method 5, Sections 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, and 7.1.4, respectively.

7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. TCE-insoluble, heat-stable grease (if needed). This is not necessary if screw-on connectors with Teflon sleeves, or similar, are used.

7.2 Sample Recovery. Reagent grade TCE, ≤0.001 percent residue and stored in glass bottles. Run TCE blanks before field use, and use only TCE with low blank values (≤0.001 percent). In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of TCE used be subtracted from the sample weight.

7.3 Analysis. Two reagents are required for the analysis:

7.3.1 TCE. Same as in Section 7.2.

7.3.2 Desiccant. Same as in Method 5, Section 7.3.2.

8.0. Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport

8.1. Pretest Preparation. Unless otherwise specified, maintain and calibrate all components according to the procedure described in APTD-0576, “Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment” (Reference 3 in Method 5, Section 17.0).

8.1.1 Prepare probe liners and sampling nozzles as needed for use. Thoroughly clean each component with soap and water followed by a minimum of three TCE rinses. Use the probe and nozzle brushes during at least one of the TCE rinses (refer to Section 8.7 for rinsing techniques). Cap or seal the open ends of the probe liners and nozzles to prevent contamination during shipping.

8.1.2 Prepare silica gel portions and glass filters as specified in Method 5, Section 8.1.

8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Select the sampling site, probe nozzle, and probe length as specified in Method 5, Section 8.2. Select a total sampling time greater than or equal to the minimum total sampling time specified in the “Test Methods and Procedures” section of the applicable subpart of the regulations. Follow the guidelines outlined in Method 5, Section 8.2 for sampling time per point and total sample volume collected.

8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Prepare the sampling train as specified in Method 5, Section 8.3, with the addition of the precollector cyclone, if used, between the probe and filter holder. The temperature of the precollector cyclone, if used, should be maintained in the same range as that of the filter, i.e., 42 ± 10 °C (108 ± 18 °F). Use no stopcock grease on ground glass joints unless grease is insoluble in TCE.

8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as Method 5, Section 8.4.

8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Operate the sampling train as described in Method 5, Section 8.5, except maintain the temperature of the gas exiting the filter holder at 42 ± 10 °C (108 ± 18 °F).

8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, Section 8.6.

8.7 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, Section 8.7.1 through 8.7.6.1, with the addition of the following:

8.7.1 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter Holder).

8.7.1.1 Taking care to see that material on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover PM or any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, precollector cyclone and collector flask (if used), and front half of the filter holder by washing these components with TCE and placing the wash in a glass container. Carefully measure the total amount of TCE used in the rinses. Perform the TCE rinses as described in Method 5, Section 8.7.6.2, using TCE instead of acetone.

8.7.1.2 Brush and rinse the inside of the cyclone, cyclone collection flask, and the front half of the filter holder. Brush and rinse each surface three times or more, if necessary, to remove visible PM.

8.7.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Same as in Method 5, Section 8.7.6.3.

8.7.3 Impinger Water. Same as Method 5, Section 8.7.6.4.

8.8 Blank. Save a portion of the TCE used for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this TCE directly from the wash bottle being used, and place it in a glass sample container labeled “TCE Blank.”

9.0 Quality Control

9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.

9.2 A quality control (QC) check of the volume metering system at the field site is suggested before collecting the sample. Use the procedure outlined in Method 5, Section 9.2.

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

Same as Method 5, Section 10.0.

11.0 Analytical Procedures

11.1 Analysis. Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5A-1. Handle each sample container as follows:

11.1.1 Container No. 1 (Filter). Transfer the filter from the sample container to a tared glass weighing dish, and desiccate for 24 hours in a desiccator containing anhydrous calcium sulfate. Rinse Container No. 1 with a measured amount of TCE, and analyze this rinse with the contents of Container No. 2. Weigh the filter to a constant weight. For the purpose of this analysis, the term “constant weight” means a difference of no more than 10 percent of the net filter weight or 2 mg (whichever is greater) between two consecutive weighings made 24 hours apart. Report the “final weight” to the nearest 0.1 mg as the average of these two values.

11.1.2 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter Holder).

11.1.2.1 Before adding the rinse from Container No. 1 to Container No. 2, note the level of liquid in Container No. 2, and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If noticeable leakage occurred, either void the sample or take steps, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.

11.1.2.2 Add the rinse from Container No. 1 to Container No. 2 and measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetrically to ±0.5 g. Check to see whether there is any appreciable quantity of condensed water present in the TCE rinse (look for a boundary layer or phase separation). If the volume of condensed water appears larger than 5 ml, separate the oil-TCE fraction from the water fraction using a separatory funnel. Measure the volume of the water phase to the nearest ml; adjust the stack gas moisture content, if necessary (see Sections 12.3 and 12.4). Next, extract the water phase with several 25-ml portions of TCE until, by visual observation, the TCE does not remove any additional organic material. Transfer the remaining water fraction to a tared beaker and evaporate to dryness at 93 °C (200 °F), desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.

11.1.2.3 Treat the total TCE fraction (including TCE from the filter container rinse and water phase extractions) as follows: Transfer the TCE and oil to a tared beaker, and evaporate at ambient temperature and pressure. The evaporation of TCE from the solution may take several days. Do not desiccate the sample until the solution reaches an apparent constant volume or until the odor of TCE is not detected. When it appears that the TCE has evaporated, desiccate the sample, and weigh it at 24-hour intervals to obtain a “constant weight” (as defined for Container No. 1 above). The “total weight” for Container No. 2 is the sum of the evaporated PM weight of the TCE-oil and water phase fractions. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.

11.1.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). This step may be conducted in the field. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance.

11.1.4 “TCE Blank” Container. Measure TCE in this container either volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer the TCE to a tared 250-ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.

Note:

In order to facilitate the evaporation of TCE liquid samples, these samples may be dried in a controlled temperature oven at temperatures up to 38 °C (100 °F) until the liquid is evaporated.

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as they give equivalent results.

12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, Section 12.1, with the following additions:

C_t = TCE blank residue concentration, mg/g.

m_t = Mass of residue of TCE blank after evaporation, mg.

V_pc = Volume of water collected in precollector, ml.

V_t = Volume of TCE blank, ml.

V_tw = Volume of TCE used in wash, ml.

W_t = Weight of residue in TCE wash, mg.

ρ_t = Density of TCE (see label on bottle), g/ml.

12.2 Dry Gas Meter Temperature, Orifice Pressure Drop, and Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5, Sections 12.2 and 12.3, except use data obtained in performing this test.

12.3 Volume of Water Vapor.

Where:

K₂ = 0.001333 m³/ml for metric units.

= 0.04706 ft³/ml for English units.

12.4 Moisture Content.

Note:

In saturated or water droplet-laden gas streams, two calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made, one from the impinger and precollector analysis (Equations 5A-1 and 5A-2) and a second from the assumption of saturated conditions. The lower of the two values of moisture content shall be considered correct. The procedure for determining the moisture content based upon assumption of saturated conditions is given in Section 4.0 of Method 4. For the purpose of this method, the average stack gas temperature from Figure 5-3 of Method 5 may be used to make this determination, provided that the accuracy of the in-stack temperature sensor is within 1 °C (2 °F).

12.5 TCE Blank Concentration.

Note:

In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of TCE used be subtracted from the sample weight.

12.6 TCE Wash Blank.

12.7 Total PM Weight. Determine the total PM catch from the sum of the weights obtained from Containers 1 and 2, less the TCE blank.

12.8 PM Concentration.

Where:

K₃ = 0.001 g/mg for metric units

= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units

12.9 Isokinetic Variation. Same as in Method 5, Section 12.11.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

Same as Method 5, Section 17.0.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data

Plant

Date

Run No.

Filter No.

Amount liquid lost during transport

Acetone blank volume, m1

Acetone blank concentration, mg/mg (Equation 5-4)

Acetone wash blank, mg (Equation 5-5)

Method 5B—Determination of Nonsulfuric Acid Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Analyte. Nonsulfuric acid particulate matter. No CAS number assigned.

1.2 Applicability. This method is determining applicable for the determination of nonsulfuric acid particulate matter from stationary sources, only where specified by an applicable subpart of the regulations or where approved by the Administrator for a particular application.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 160 ± 14 °C (320 ± 25 °F). The collected sample is then heated in an oven at 160 °C (320 °F) for 6 hours to volatilize any condensed sulfuric acid that may have been collected, and the nonsulfuric acid particulate mass is determined gravimetrically.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Same as Method 5, Section 6.0, with the following addition and exceptions:

6.1 Sample Collection. The probe liner heating system and filter heating system must be capable of maintaining a sample gas temperature of 160 ± 14 °C (320 ± 25 °F).

6.2 Sample Preparation. An oven is required for drying the sample.

7.0 Reagents and Standards

Same as Method 5, Section 7.0.

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport.

 Same as Method 5, with the exception of the following:

8.1 Initial Filter Tare. Oven dry the filter at 160 ± 5 °C (320 ± 10 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, cool in a desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh. Desiccate to constant weight to obtain the initial tare weight. Use the applicable specifications and techniques of Section 8.1.3 of Method 5 for this determination.

8.2 Probe and Filter Temperatures. Maintain the probe outlet and filter temperatures at 160 ± 14 °C (320 ± 25 °F).

9.0 Quality Control

Same as Method 5, Section 9.0.

10.0 Calibration and Standardization

Same as Method 5, Section 10.0.

11.0 Analytical Procedure

Same as Method 5, Section 11.0, except replace Section

11.2.2 With the following:

11.1 Container No. 2. Note the level of liquid in the container, and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetrically to ±0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Then oven dry the probe and filter samples at a temperature of 160 ± 5 °C (320 ± 10 °F) for 6 hours. Cool in a desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh to constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.

12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations

Same as in Method 5, Section 12.0.

13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]

14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]

15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]

16.0 References

Same as Method 5, Section 17.0.

17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data. [Reserved]

Method 5D—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions from Positive Pressure Fabric Filters

Note:

This method does not include all of the specifications (e.g., equipment and supplies) and procedures (e.g., sampling and analytical) essential to its performance. Some material is incorporated by reference from other methods in this part. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, persons using this method should have a thorough knowledge of at least the following additional test methods: Method 1, Method 2, Method 3, Method 5, Method 17.

1.0 Scope and Application

1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.

1.2 Applicability.

1.2.1 This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from positive pressure fabric filters. Emissions are determined in terms of concentration (mg/m³ or gr/ft³) and emission rate (kg/hr or lb/hr).

1.2.2 The General Provisions of 40 CFR part 60, § 60.8(e), require that the owner or operator of an affected facility shall provide performance testing facilities. Such performance testing facilities include sampling ports, safe sampling platforms, safe access to sampling sites, and utilities for testing. It is intended that affected facilities also provide sampling locations that meet the specification for adequate stack length and minimal flow disturbances as described in Method 1. Provisions for testing are often overlooked factors in designing fabric filters or are extremely costly. The purpose of this procedure is to identify appropriate alternative locations and procedures for sampling the emissions from positive pressure fabric filters. The requirements that the affected facility owner or operator provide adequate access to performance testing facilities remain in effect.

1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.

2.0 Summary of Method

2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature at or above the exhaust gas temperature up to a nominal 120°C (248 ± 25°F). The particulate mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.

3.0 Definitions [Reserved]

4.0 Interferences [Reserved]

5.0 Safety

5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.

6.0 Equipment and Supplies

Same as Section 6.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.

7.0 Reagents and Standards

Same as Section 7.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.

8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport

Same Section 8.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17, except replace Section 8.2.1 of Method 5 with the following:

8.1 Determination of Measurement Site. The configuration of positive pressure fabric filter structures frequently are not amenable to emission testing according to the requirements of Method 1. Following are several alternatives for determining measurement sites for positive pressure fabric filters.

8.1.1 Stacks Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Use a measurement site as specified in Method 1, Section 11.1.

8.1.2 Short Stacks Not Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Use stack extensions and the procedures in Method 1. Alternatively, use flow straightening vanes of the “egg-crate” type (see Figure 5D-1). Locate the measurement site downstream of the straightening vanes at a distance equal to or greater than two times the average equivalent diameter of the vane openings and at least one-half of the overall stack diameter upstream of the stack outlet.